FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 1X1 802.11 b/g/n - BT4.0 Combo PCIe minicard

User's Manual Satellite W30t-A/W30Dt-A Satellite Click Toshiba Click series Table of Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 TOSHIBA Legal, Regulatory and Safety Copyright, Disclaimer and Trademarks .............................................. 1-1 Regulatory Information ......................................................................... 1-2 Video Standard Notice .......................................................................... 1-7 OpenSSL Toolkit License Issues ......................................................... 1-7 ENERGY STAR Program .................................................................. 1-10 Disposing of the computer and the computer's batteries ............... 1-11 General Precautions ........................................................................... 1-11 Safety Icons ......................................................................................... 1-13 Getting Started Equipment checklist ............................................................................. 2-1 Dual operating mode ............................................................................. 2-1 Conventions ........................................................................................... 2-1 Using your computer for the first time ................................................ 2-2 Turning off the power .......................................................................... 2-11 The Grand Tour Front with the display closed ............................................................... 3-1 Left side .................................................................................................. 3-2 Right side ............................................................................................... 3-3 Back ........................................................................................................ 3-4 Underside ............................................................................................... 3-5 Front with the display open .................................................................. 3-5 Internal Hardware Components ........................................................... 3-8 Power Condition Descriptions ........................................................... 3-10 Operating Basics Operating in Tablet Mode ..................................................................... 4-1 Using the Touch Screen ....................................................................... 4-2 Using the Touch Pad ............................................................................. 4-3 The Keyboard ......................................................................................... 4-4 Battery .................................................................................................... 4-7 Memory media ..................................................................................... 4-11 External display ................................................................................... 4-14 Optional TOSHIBA Accessories ........................................................ 4-16 Sound System and Video mode ......................................................... 4-16 User's Manual ii Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Utilities and Advanced Usage Utilities and Applications ...................................................................... 5-1 Special features ..................................................................................... 5-4 TOSHIBA Password Utility ................................................................... 5-6 TOSHIBA System Settings ................................................................... 5-8 TOSHIBA Media Player by sMedio TrueLink+ .................................... 5-9 TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor .............................................................. 5-11 TOSHIBA Setup Utility ........................................................................ 5-12 USB Charge .......................................................................................... 5-13 System Recovery ................................................................................ 5-15 Troubleshooting Problem solving process ...................................................................... 6-1 Hardware and system checklist ........................................................... 6-4 TOSHIBA support ................................................................................ 6-13 Appendix Specifications ........................................................................................ 7-1 AC Power Cord and Connectors .......................................................... 7-2 Information for Wireless Devices ........................................................ 7-3 Legal Footnotes ................................................................................... 7-12 Glossary ............................................................................................... 7-14 Index User's Manual iii User's Manual iv Chapter 1 TOSHIBA Legal, Regulatory and Safety This chapter states the Legal, regulatory and safety information applicable to TOSHIBA computers. Copyright, Disclaimer and Trademarks Copyright 2013 by TOSHIBA Corporation. All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of TOSHIBA. No patent liability is assumed, with respect to the use of the information contained herein. First edition July 2013 Copyright authority for music, movies, computer programs, databases and other intellectual property covered by copyright laws belongs to the author or to the copyright owner. Copyrighted material can be reproduced only for personal use or use within the home. Any other use beyond that stipulated above (including conversion to digital format, alteration, transfer of copied material and distribution on a network) without the permission of the copyright owner is a violation of copyright or author's rights and is subject to civil damages or criminal action. Please comply with copyright laws in making any reproduction from this manual. Disclaimer This manual has been validated and reviewed for accuracy. The instructions and descriptions it contains are accurate for your computer at the time of this manuals production. However, succeeding computers and manuals are subject to change without notice. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for damages incurred directly or indirectly from errors, omissions or discrepancies between the computer and the manual. Trademarks Intel, Intel SpeedStep, Intel Core and Centrino are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. AMD, the AMD Arrow logo, PowerPlay, Vari-Bright and combinations thereof are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. User's Manual 1-1 Windows, Microsoft and Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Toshiba Corporation and its affiliates is under license. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. sMedio and sMedio TrueLink+ are trademarks or registered trademarks of sMedio, Inc. Secure Digital and SD are trademarks of SD Card Association. QUALCOMM is a trademark of Qualcomm Incorporated, registered in the United States and other countries. ATHEROS is a trademark of Qualcomm Atheros, Inc., registered in the United States and other countries. Realtek is a registered trademark of Realtek Semiconductor Corporation. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks and DTS Studio Sound is a trademark of DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. All other product names and service names in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Regulatory Information FCC information FCC notice "Declaration of Conformity Information"

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. User's Manual 1-2 Only peripherals complying with the FCC class B limits may be attached to this equipment. Operation with non-compliant peripherals or peripherals not recommended by TOSHIBA is likely to result in interference to radio and TV reception. Shielded cables must be used between the external devices and the computers micro HDMI port, as well as the micro USB 2.0 port, and Universal Serial Bus (USB 3.0) port on the TOSHIBA Keyboard Dock. Changes or modifications made to this equipment, not expressly approved by TOSHIBA or parties authorized by TOSHIBA could void the users authority to operate the equipment. FCC conditions This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Contact Address:

Telephone:

TOSHIBA America Information Systems, Inc. 9740 Irvine Boulevard Irvine, California 92618-1697

(949) 583-3000 This information is only applicable for the countries/regions where it is required. EU Declaration of Conformity This product is carrying the CE-Mark in accordance with the related European Directives. Responsible for CE-Marking is TOSHIBA EUROPE GMBH, Hammfelddamm 8, 41460 Neuss, Germany. The complete and official EU Declaration of Conformity can be found on TOSHIBAs web site http://epps.toshiba-teg.com on the Internet. CE compliance This product is labeled with the CE Mark in accordance with the applicable European Directives, notably RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU, Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Directive 1999/5/EC, User's Manual 1-3 Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC (ErP) and the related implementing measures. This product and the original options are designed to observe the related EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) and safety standards. However, TOSHIBA cannot guarantee that this product still observes these EMC standards if options or cables not produced by TOSHIBA are connected or implemented. In this case the persons who have connected/implemented those options/cables have to provide assurance that the system (PC plus options/cables) still fulfils the required standards. To avoid general EMC problems, the following guidance should be noted:

Only CE marked options should be connected/implemented Only best shielded cables should be connected Working environment This product was designed to fulfil the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) requirements to be observed for so-called Residential, commercial and light industry environments. TOSHIBA do not approve the use of this product in working environments other than the above mentioned Residential, commercial and light industry environments. For example, the following environments are not approved:

Industrial Environments (e.g. environments where a mains voltage of 380 V three-phase is used) Medical Environments Automotive Environments Aircraft Environments Any consequences resulting from the use of this product in working environments that are not approved are not the responsibility of TOSHIBA. The consequences of the use of this product in non-approved working environments may be:

Interference with other devices or machines in the near surrounding area. Malfunction of, or data loss from, this product caused by disturbances generated by other devices or machines in the near surrounding area. Therefore TOSHIBA strongly recommend that the electromagnetic compatibility of this product should be suitably tested in all non-approved working environments before use. In the case of automobiles or aircraft, the manufacturer or airline respectively should be asked for permission before use of this product. Furthermore, for general safety reasons, the use of this product in environments with explosive atmospheres is not permitted. User's Manual 1-4 VCCI Class B Information (Japan Only) Canadian regulatory information (Canada only) This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulation of the Canadian Department of Communications. Note that Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) regulations provide, that changes or modifications not expressly approved by TOSHIBA Corporation could void your authority to operate this equipment. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numrique de la class B respecte toutes les exgences du Rglement sur le matriel brouileur du Canada. Following information is only valid for EU-member States:

Disposal of products The crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol indicates that products must be collected and disposed of separately from household waste. Integrated batteries and accumulators can be disposed of with the product. They will be separated at the recycling centres. The black bar indicates that the product was placed on the market after August 13, 2005. By participating in separate collection of products and batteries, you will help to assure the proper disposal of products and batteries and thus help to prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health. For more detailed information about the collection and recycling programmes available in your country, please visit our website (http://eu.computers.toshiba-europe.com) or contact your local city office or the shop where you purchased the product. User's Manual 1-5 Disposal of batteries and/or accumulators The crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol indicates that batteries and/or accumulators must be collected and disposed of separately from household waste. If the battery or accumulator contains more than the specified values of lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), and/or cadmium (Cd) defined in the Battery Directive (2006/66/

EC), then the chemical symbols for lead (Pb), mercury

(Hg) and/or cadmium (Cd) will appear below the crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol. By participating in separate collection of batteries, you will help to assure the proper disposal of products and batteries and thus help to prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health. For more detailed information about the collection and recycling programmes available in your country, please visit our website (http://eu.computers.toshiba-europe.com) or contact your local city office or the shop where you purchased the product. These symbols may not stick depending on the country and region where you purchased. REACH - Compliance Statement The new European Union (EU) chemical regulation, REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals), entered into force on 1 June 2007. TOSHIBA will meet all REACH requirements and is committed to provide our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products according to REACH regulation. Please consult the following website www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/

info/reach for information about the presence in our articles of substances included on the candidate list according to article 59(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1907/2006 (REACH) in a concentration above 0.1 % weight by weight. Following information is only for Turkey:

Compliant with EEE Regulations: TOSHIBA meets all requirements of Turkish regulation 26891 Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. The number of possible pixel failures of your display is defined according to ISO 9241-307 standards. If the number of pixel failures is less than this standard, they will not be counted as defect or failure. User's Manual 1-6 Battery is a consumption product, since the battery time depends on the usage of your computer. If the battery can not be charged at all, then it is a defect or failure. The changes in battery time is not a defect or failure. Following information is only for India:

The use of this symbol indicates that this product may not be treated as household waste. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. For more detailed information about recycling of this product, please visit our website (http://www.toshiba-

india.com) or contact call center (1800-200-8674). These symbols may not stick depending on the country and region where you purchased. Video Standard Notice THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC, THE VC-1 AND MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (I) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE ABOVE STANDARDS ("VIDEO") AND/OR (II) DECODING AVC, VC-1 AND MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE SUCH VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM. OpenSSL Toolkit License Issues LICENSE ISSUES

==============

The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. OpenSSL License User's Manual 1-7

------------------------

/*=====================================================

Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software 4. must display the following acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"

The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS''

AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

=====================================================

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

*/

Original SSLeay License User's Manual 1-8

----------------------------------

/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code;

not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:

"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com)"

The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:

"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson

(tjh@cryptsoft.com)"

4. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF User's Manual 1-9 USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

*/

ENERGY STAR Program Your Computer model may be ENERGY STAR compliant. If the model you purchased is compliant, it is labeled with the ENERGY STAR logo on the computer and the following information applies. TOSHIBA is a partner in the ENERGY STAR Program and has designed this computer to meet the latest ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Your computer ships with the power management options preset to a configuration that will provide the most stable operating environment and optimum system performance for both AC power and battery modes. To conserve energy, your computer is set to enter the low-

power Sleep Mode which shuts down the system and display within 15 minutes of inactivity in AC power mode. TOSHIBA recommends that you leave this and other energy saving features active, so that your computer will operate at its maximum energy efficiency. You can wake the computer from Sleep Mode by pressing the power button. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency guidelines set by the US EPA and the EU Commission. According to the EPA, a computer meeting the new ENERGY STAR specifications will use between 20% and 50% less energy depending on how it is used. Visit http://www.eu-energystar.org or http://

www.energystar.gov for more information regarding the ENERGY STAR Program. User's Manual 1-10 Disposing of the computer and the computer's batteries Contact an authorized TOSHIBA service provider for details regarding how to dispose of the computer and the batteries. General Precautions TOSHIBA computers are designed to optimize safety, minimize strain and withstand the rigors of portability. However, certain precautions should be observed to further reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the computer. Be certain to read the general precautions below and to note the cautions included in the text of the manual. Provide adequate ventilation Always make sure your computer and AC adaptor have adequate ventilation and are protected from overheating when the power is turned on or when an AC adaptor is connected to a power outlet (even if your computer is in Sleep Mode). In this condition, observe the following:

Never cover your computer or AC adaptor with any object. Never place your computer or AC adaptor near a heat source, such as an electric blanket or heater. Never cover or block the air vents including those located at the base of the computer. Always operate your computer on a hard flat surface. Using your computer on a carpet or other soft material can block the vents. Always provide sufficient space around the computer. Overheating your computer or AC adaptor could cause system failure, computer or AC adaptor damage or a fire, possibly resulting in serious injury. Creating a computer-friendly environment Place the computer on a flat surface that is large enough for the computer and any other items you are using, such as a printer. Leave enough space around the computer and other equipment to provide adequate ventilation. Otherwise, they may overheat. To keep your computer in prime operating condition, protect your work area from:

Dust, moisture, and direct sunlight. Equipment that generates a strong electromagnetic field, such as stereo speakers (other than speakers that are connected to the computer) or speakerphones. Rapid changes in temperature or humidity and sources of temperature change such as air conditioner vents or heaters. User's Manual 1-11 Extreme heat, cold, or humidity. Liquids and corrosive chemicals. Stress injury Carefully read the Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. It contains information on the prevention of stress injuries to your hands and wrists that can be caused by extensive keyboard use. It also includes information on work space design, posture and lighting that can help reduce physical stress. Heat injury Avoid prolonged physical contact with the computer. If the computer is used for long periods, its surface can become very warm. While the temperature will not feel hot to the touch, if you maintain physical contact with the computer for a long time, for example if you rest the computer on your lap or if you keep your hands on the palm rest, your skin might suffer a low-heat injury. If the computer has been used for a long time, avoid direct contact with the metal plate supporting the various interface ports as this can become hot. The surface of the AC adaptor can become hot when in use but this condition does not indicate a malfunction. If you need to transport the AC adaptor, you should disconnect it and let it cool before moving it. Do not lay the AC adaptor on a material that is sensitive to heat as the material could become damaged. Pressure or impact damage Do not apply heavy pressure to the computer or subject it to any form of strong impact as this can damage the computer's components or otherwise cause it to malfunction. Cleaning the computer To help ensure long, trouble-free operation, keep the computer free of dust and dirt, and use care with all liquids around it. Be careful not to spill liquids into the computer. If the computer does get wet, turn the power off immediately and let the computer dry completely - in these circumstance you should get the computer inspected by an authorized service provider in order to assess the scope of any damage. Clean the plastics of the computer using a slightly water dampened cloth. You can clean the display screen by spraying a small amount of glass cleaner onto a soft, clean cloth and then wiping the screen gently with the cloth. User's Manual 1-12 Never spray cleaner directly onto the computer or let liquid run into any part of it. Never use harsh or caustic chemical products to clean the computer. Moving the computer While the computer is designed for flexible day-to-day usage you should exercise a few simple precautions when moving it in order to help ensure trouble-free operation. Turn off (shut down) the computer. Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripherals before moving the computer (The keyboard dock, however, can be moved when connected). Close the display panel (not applicable in tablet mode). Do not pick up the computer by its display panel. Before carrying your computer, shut it down, disconnect the AC adaptor and allow it to cool down - a failure to follow this instruction may result in minor heat injury. Be careful not to subject the computer to impact or shock - a failure to follow this instruction could result in damage to computer, computer failure or loss of data. Never transport your computer with any cards installed - this may cause damage to either the computer and/or the card resulting in computer failure. Always use a suitable carry case when transporting the computer. When carrying your computer, be sure to hold it securely so that it does not fall or hit anything. Do not carry your computer by holding any of its protruding elements. Mobile phones Please be aware that the use of mobile phones can interfere with the audio system. The operation of the computer will not be impaired in any way, but it is recommended that a minimum distance of 30cm is maintained between the computer and a mobile phone that is in use. Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort All important information on the safe and proper use of this computer is described in the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. Be sure to read it before using the computer. Safety Icons Safety icons are used in this manual to bring important information to your attention. Each type of message is identified as shown below. User's Manual 1-13 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which could result in death or serious injury, if you do not follow instructions. A caution informs you that improper use of equipment or failure to follow instructions may cause data loss, equipment damage, or may result in minor or moderate injury. Please read. A note is a hint or advice that helps you make best use of your equipment. User's Manual 1-14 Chapter 2 Getting Started This chapter provides an equipment checklist, and basic information to start using your computer. Some of the features described in this manual may not function properly if you use an operating system that was not pre-installed by TOSHIBA. Equipment checklist Carefully unpack your computer, taking care to save the box and packaging materials for future use. Hardware Check to make sure you have all the following items:

TOSHIBA Portable Personal Computer TOSHIBA Keyboard Dock AC adaptor and power cord (2-pin plug or 3-pin plug) Documentation User Information Guide Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort If any of the items are missing or damaged, contact your dealer immediately. Dual operating mode The computer is provided with a TOSHIBA Keyboard Dock and support dual operating mode - it can be easily converted from a tablet PC to a laptop PC. Throughout this manual, operating your computer as a tablet PC and a laptop PC is called "tablet mode" and "laptop mode" respectively. Conventions This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight terms and operating procedures. User's Manual 2-1 HDD or Hard disk Drive Some models are equipped with a "Solid State Drive (SSD)" instead of a hard disk drive. In this manual, the word "HDD" or "Hard disk drive" also refers to the SSD unless otherwise stated. Click Right-click Double-click Charm Desktop Start screen Tap the Touch Pad or click the left Touch Pad control button once (laptop mode). Left click the mouse once. Tap the touch screen once. Click the right Touch Pad control button once (laptop mode). Right click the mouse once. Press and hold on the touch screen. Tap the Touch Pad or click the left Touch Pad control button twice (laptop mode). Left click the mouse twice. Tap the touch screen twice. By swiping in from the right edge of the touch screen or pointing the mouse pointer to the lower-right (or upper-right) corner of your screen, you will find a list of charms: Search, Share, Start, Devices and Settings. Click the Desktop tile from the Start screen to access the desktop. You can go to the Start screen by clicking the Start charm. You can also use the Windows

) on the keyboard dock or the logo key (

computer to go to the Start screen. For detailed information, please refer to the Windows Help and Support. Using your computer for the first time Be sure to read the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for information on the safe and proper use of this computer. It is intended to help you be more comfortable and productive while using a notebook computer. By following the recommendations in it you may reduce your chance of developing a painful or disabling injury to your hand, arms, shoulders or neck. This section provides basic information to start using your computer. It covers the following topics:

Connecting TOSHIBA Keyboard Dock Connecting the AC adaptor Turning on the power User's Manual 2-2 Initial setup Getting to know Windows Use a virus-check program and make sure it is updated regularly. Never format storage media without checking its content - formatting destroys all stored data. It is a good idea to periodically back up the internal Solid State Drive or other main storage device to external media. General storage media is not durable or stable over long periods of time and under certain conditions may result in data loss. Before you install a device or application, save any data in memory to the Solid State Drive or other storage media. Failure to do so may result in the loss of data. Connecting TOSHIBA Keyboard Dock TOSHIBA Keyboard Dock can turn your computer into a laptop for extensibility including a physical keyboard and more ports. To use the computer in laptop mode, you need to connect TOSHIBA Keyboard Dock to the computer by following the steps below:

1. Hold the computer on both the left and right sides. 2. Align the docking interface located on the computer with the docking connector on the keyboard dock. User's Manual 2-3 3. Press down the computer until it clicks into place. The docking connector on the keyboard dock engages the docking interface on the computer. Figure 2-1 Connecting the keyboard dock 1. Hook 2. Docking connector Computer appearance depends on the model you purchased. When you are operating in laptop mode, the computer body can be opened to a wide range of angles for optimal viewing. While holding down the palm rest with one hand so that the body of the keyboard dock is not raised, slowly lift the computer body - this will allow the angle of the display screen to be adjusted to provide optimum clarity. Figure 2-2 Opening the computer body 1. Computer body Use reasonable care when opening and closing computer body. Opening it vigorously or slamming it shut could damage the computer. User's Manual 2-4 1121 Be careful not to open the computer body too far as this could put stress on the hinges and cause damage. Please close the computer body when you move or are carrying the computer. Do not lift the computer by the palm rest on the keyboard dock. Fail to follow this instruction may cause damage to the computer or result in minor injury. Do not press or push with excess force on the display screen. Do not lift the computer by the display screen. Do not close the computer with pens or any other objects left in between the computer and the keyboard dock. Please be careful not to hurt your fingers when you are docking the computer to the keyboard dock. Never remove the computer without unlocking by the release latch, otherwise it may cause damage to the computer. Never turn the computer holder without the computer docked, otherwise it may cause damage or possibly result in mechanical malfunction. To disconnect and remove the computer from the keyboard dock, follow the steps below:

1. Disconnect and remove all peripheral devices and cables connected to the computer. User's Manual 2-5 2. Slide and hold the Release latch to the left (unlock position) and then slowly lift the computer to release it from the computer holder and completely off the keyboard dock. Figure 2-3 Removing the computer from the keyboard dock 1. Release latch 2. Computer holder Computer appearance depends on the model you purchased. Connecting the AC adaptor Connect the AC adaptor when you need to charge the battery or you want to operate from AC power. It is also the fastest way to get started, because the battery pack will need to be charged before you can operate from battery power. The AC adaptor can automatically adjust to any voltage ranging from 100 to 240 volts and to a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz, enabling you to use this computer in almost any country/region. The adaptor converts AC power to DC power and reduces the voltage supplied to this computer. Always use the TOSHIBA AC adaptor that was included with your computer, or use AC adaptors specified by TOSHIBA to avoid any risk of fire or other damage to the computer. Use of an incompatible AC adaptor could cause fire or damage to the computer possibly resulting in serious injury. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any damage caused by use of an incompatible adaptor. Never plug the AC adaptor into a power source that does not correspond to both the voltage and the frequency specified on the regulatory label of the unit. Failure to do so could result in a fire or electric shock, possibly resulting in serious injury. User's Manual 2-6 12 Always use or purchase power cables that comply with the legal voltage and frequency specifications and requirements in the country of use. Failure to do so could result in a fire or electric shock, possibly resulting in serious injury. The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in the region the computer is bought and should not be used outside this region. For use in other regions, please buy power cords that conform to safety rules and regulations in the particular region. Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug. When you connect the AC adaptor to the computer, always follow the steps in the exact order as described in this Users Manual. Connecting the power cable to a live electrical outlet should be the last step otherwise the adaptor DC output plug could hold an electrical charge and cause an electrical shock or minor bodily injury when touched. As a general safety precaution, avoid touching any metal parts. Never place your computer or AC adaptor on a wooden surface, furniture, or any other surface that could be marred by exposure to heat since the computer base and AC adaptor's surface increase in temperature during normal use. Always place your computer or AC adaptor on a flat and hard surface that is resistant to heat damage. Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for detailed precautions and handling instructions. 1. Connect the power cord to the AC adaptor. Figure 2-4 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (2-pin plug) Figure 2-5 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (3-pin plug) Either a 2-pin or 3-pin adaptor/cord will be included with the computer depending on the model. User's Manual 2-7 2. Connect the AC adaptors DC output plug to the DC IN 19V jack. Figure 2-6 Connecting the DC output plug to the computer (laptop mode) 1. DC IN 19V jack 2. DC output plug Figure 2-7 Connecting the DC output plug to the computer (tablet mode) 1. DC IN 19V jack 2. DC output plug Computer appearance depends on the model you purchased. 3. Plug the power cord into a live wall outlet - the DC IN/Battery indicator should glow. Turning on the power This section describes how to turn on the power - the Power indicator will then indicate the status. Please refer to the Power Condition Descriptions section for more information. Never keep your body too close to the computer while turning on the power. After you turn on the power for the first time, do not turn it off until you have set up the operating system. User's Manual 2-8 1212 Volume cannot be adjusted during Windows Setup. 1. Press the computer's power button. Figure 2-8 Turning on the power (laptop mode) 1. Power button Computer appearance depends on the model you purchased. Figure 2-9 Turning on the power (tablet mode) 1. Power button Computer appearance depends on the model you purchased. Initial setup The Windows Startup Screen will be the first screen displayed when you turn on the power. Follow the on-screen instructions on each screen in order to properly install the operating system. When it is displayed, be sure to read the License Terms carefully. User's Manual 2-9 11 Getting to know Windows For detailed information on what is new and how to operate Windows 8, please refer to the Windows Help and Support. Start screen The Start screen is the launching pad for everything you can do in the Windows operating system, providing new and easy ways to access everything from your favorite apps and Web sites to your contacts and other important information. From the Start screen, you can just start typing to search for what you want. From there, you can easily switch between results for apps, files, and more. Charms Use the Windows Charms to start apps, find documents, set up system components, and perform most other computing tasks. By pointing the mouse pointer to the upper or lower right corner of your screen, you will find a list of charms: Search, Share, Start, Devices and Settings. Search This Charm allows you to locate items on your computer. It can help you find apps, documents, photos, and your favorite music. Share Start Devices Settings This Charm allows you to share music and photos with your favorite social Web sites. This Charm takes you to the Start screen or, if already on the Start screen, returns you to your last app. This Charm allows you to manage your hardware devices. This Charm allows you to manage your system settings. Tiles Tiles can be accessed and launched from the Start screen. Typical Start screen tiles are the Desktop tile and Mail tile, as well as tiles representing all other applications downloaded to your system. User's Manual 2-10 Windows Store Although many applications will be pre-installed or built-in to your computer, you will also have the ability to download many other applications at the click of your mouse. In the Windows Store you can search for and browse thousands of apps, all grouped into easy to find categories.

) and Picture password(

Sign-in options Windows offers a number of sign-in options including Password(

PIN(

unauthorized access. You are allowed to select an option on the Windows login screen by clicking sign-in options if you have multiple sign-in methods set for a user account. Password authentication is the default sign-in option.

) authentication to prevent from

), Turning off the power The power can be turned off in one of the following modes, either Shut Down Mode, Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode. Shut Down Mode When you turn off the power in Shut Down Mode, no data will be saved and the computer will boot to the operating system's main screen the next time it is turned on. 1. If you have entered data, either save it to the Solid State Drive or to other storage media. 2. Make sure all disk/disc activity has stopped before removing the disk/

disc. If you turn off the power while a disk (disc) is being accessed, you may lose data or damage the disk. Never turn off the power while an application is running. Doing so could cause loss of data. Never turn off the power, disconnect an external storage device or remove storage media during data read/write. Doing so can cause data loss. 3. Click the Settings charm. 4. Click Power and then select Shut down. 5. Do not turn the computer or peripheral devices back on immediately - wait a short period to avoid any potential damage. Turn off any peripheral devices connected to your computer. User's Manual 2-11 Restarting the computer Certain conditions require that you reset the computer, for example if:

You change certain computer settings. If you need to restart the computer, there are two ways this can be achieved:

In the Settings charm, click Power and then select Restart. Press CTRL, ALT and DEL simultaneously (once) on the keyboard dock to display the menu window, and then select Restart by clicking the power icon (

) in the lower-right corner. Sleep Mode If you have to interrupt your work, you are able to turn off the power without exiting from your software by placing the computer into Sleep Mode. In this mode data is maintained in the computer's main memory so that when you turn on the power again, you can continue working right where you left off. When you have to turn off your computer aboard an aircraft or in places where electronic devices are regulated or controlled, always completely shut down the computer. This includes turning off any wireless communication functionalities, and cancelling settings that reactivate the computer automatically, such as a timer recording function. Failure to completely shut down the computer in this way could allow the operating system to reactivate and run pre-programmed tasks or preserve unsaved data, which could interfere with aviation or other systems, possibly causing serious injury. Before entering Sleep Mode, be sure to save your data. Do not switch to Sleep Mode while transferring data to external media, such as USB devices, memory media or other external memory devices, as data will be lost. The computer will automatically go into Sleep Mode according to the settings in the Power Options (to access it, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Control Panel -> System and Security -> Power Options). To prevent the computer from automatically entering Sleep Mode, disable Sleep Mode within the Power Options. To restore the operation of the computer from Sleep Mode, press the power button or any key on the keyboard dock for a short amount of time. Please note that keyboard keys can only be used if the Wake-up on Keyboard option is enabled within the TOSHIBA System Settings. User's Manual 2-12 If the computer enters Sleep Mode while a network application is active, the application might not be restored when the computer is next turned on and the system returns from Sleep Mode. To use the Hybrid Sleep function, configure it in the Power Options. Benefits of Sleep Mode The Sleep Mode feature provides the following benefits:

Restores the previous working environment more rapidly than the Hibernation Mode feature. Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System Sleep Mode feature. Allows the use of the panel power off feature. Executing Sleep Mode You can enter Sleep Mode in one of three ways:

In the Settings charm, click Power and then select Sleep. Close the display panel. Please note that this feature must be enabled within the Power Options. Press the power button. Please note that this feature must be enabled within the Power Options. When you turn the power back on, you can continue where you left off when you shut down the computer. When the computer is in Sleep Mode, the Power indicator will blink white. If you are operating the computer on battery power, you can lengthen the overall operating time by turning it off into Hibernation Mode -

Sleep Mode will consume more power while the computer is off. Sleep Mode limitations Sleep Mode will not function under the following conditions:

Power is turned back on immediately after shutting down. Memory circuits are exposed to static electricity or electrical noise. Hibernation Mode The Hibernation Mode feature saves the contents of memory to the Solid State Drive when the computer is turned off so that, the next time it is turned on, the previous state is restored. Please note that the Hibernation Mode feature does not save the status of any peripheral devices connected to the computer. User's Manual 2-13 Save your data. While entering Hibernation Mode, the computer saves the contents of memory to the Solid State Drive. However, for safety sake, it is best to save your data manually. Data will be lost if you disconnect the AC adaptor before the save is completed. Do not switch to Hibernation Mode while transferring data to external media, such as USB devices, memory media or other external memory devices, as data will be lost. Benefits of Hibernation Mode The Hibernation Mode feature provides the following benefits:

Saves data to the Solid State Drive when the computer automatically shuts down because of a low battery condition. You can return to your previous working environment immediately when you turn on the computer. Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System Hibernate feature. Allows the use of the panel power off feature. Starting Hibernation Mode To enter Hibernation Mode, follow the steps below. 1. Click the Settings charm. 2. Click Power and then select Hibernate. In order to show Hibernate in Power menu, you need to setup according to the following steps:

1. Click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Control Panel -> System and Security -> Power Options. 2. Click Choose what the power button does or Choose what closing the lid does. 3. Click Change settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Select the Hibernate check box from Shutdown settings. 5. Click the Save changes button. Automatic Hibernation Mode The computer can be configured to enter Hibernation Mode automatically when you press the power button or close the lid. In order to define these settings, you can follow the steps as described below:

1. Click Power Options and then click Choose what the power button does or Choose what closing the lid does. User's Manual 2-14 2. Enable the desired Hibernation Mode settings for When I press the power button and When I close the lid. 3. Click the Save changes button. Data save in Hibernation Mode When you turn off the power in Hibernation Mode, the computer will take a moment to save the current data in memory to the Solid State Drive. After you turn off the computer, and the content of memory has been saved to the Solid State Drive, turn off the power to any peripheral devices. Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately. Wait a moment to let all capacitors fully discharge. User's Manual 2-15 Chapter 3 The Grand Tour This chapter identifies the various components of the computer - it is recommended that you become familiar with each before you operate the computer. Legal Footnote (Non-applicable Icons) For more information regarding Non-applicable Icons, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section. Please handle your computer carefully to avoid scratching or damaging the surface. Front with the display closed The following figure shows the front of the computer with its display panel in the closed position. Figure 3-1 Front of the computer with display panel closed 1. DC IN/Battery indicator 2. Power indicator 3. Wireless communication indicator 4. Cooling vents*

* Provided with some models. Product appearance depends on the model you purchased. DC IN/Battery indicator The DC IN/Battery indicator shows the condition of the DC IN and the battery's charge - white indicates the battery is fully charged while the power is being correctly supplied from the AC power adaptor. Please refer to the Power Condition Descriptions section for more information on this feature. User's Manual 3-1 44123 Power indicator Wireless communication indicator The Power indicator glows white when the computer is turned on. However, if you turn the computer off into Sleep Mode, this indicator will blink white. The Wireless communication indicator glows amber when the Bluetooth or Wireless LAN functions are turned on. Only some models are equipped with Bluetooth and Wireless LAN functions. Cooling vents The cooling vents help the processor to avoid overheating. Do not block the cooling vents. Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of the cooling vents. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury. Carefully clean the dust on the cooling vents surface using a soft cloth. Left side The following figure shows the left side of the computer. Figure 3-2 The left side of the computer 1. DC IN 19V jack (dock) 2. Stereo speakers 3. Force shutdown hole (tablet) 4. Power button 5. DC IN 19V jack (tablet) DC IN 19V jack Stereo speakers The AC adaptor connects to this jack in order to power the computer and charge its internal batteries. Please note that you should only use the model of AC adaptor supplied with the computer at the time of purchase - using the wrong AC adaptor can cause damage to the computer. The speakers emit sound generated by your software as well as audio alarms, such as low battery condition, generated by the system. User's Manual 3-2 12345 Force shutdown hole Insert a slender object such as a needle into this hole to force a shut down when the computer is hung. Power button Press this button to turn the computer's power on or off. Right side The following figure shows the right side of computer. Figure 3-3 The right side of the computer 1. Volume up/down button 2. Headphone/Microphone combo jack 3. Micro HDMI port 4. Micro USB 2.0 port 5. Memory media slot 6. Stereo speakers 7. Force shutdown hole (dock) 8. Universal Serial Bus (USB 3.0) port Volume up/down buttons Press the button to increase or decrease the volume. Headphone/

Microphone combo jack A 3.5 mm mini headphone/microphone combo jack enables connection of a monaural microphone or a stereo headphone. Micro HDMI port Micro USB 2.0 port The micro HDMI port can connect to HDMI cable with Type D connector. An HDMI cable sends video and audio signals. In addition to this, it can send and receive control signals. Please refer to the HDMI port section for details. The computer acts both as a host and a client via this port. It allows you to connect the computer to another computer for transferring data. When acting as a host, the computer can fast and directly communicate with other client devices without the assistance of another computer. User's Manual 3-3 12347856 Please note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all functions of all USB devices that are available. Some functions associated with a specific device might not operate properly. Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of the USB port. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury. Memory media slot This slot lets you insert a micro SD/SDXC/

SDHC memory card. Refer to the Memory media section for more information. Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of the Memory media slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury. Stereo speakers Universal Serial Bus

(USB 3.0) port The speakers emit sound generated by your software as well as audio alarms, such as low battery condition, generated by the system. One Universal Serial Bus port, which complies to the USB 3.0 standard, is provided on the right side of the computer. The USB 3.0 port is compliant with USB 3.0 standard and backward compatible with USB 2.0 devices. The port with the icon (

function.

) has Sleep and Charge USB 3.0 port(s) may work as USB 2.0 port(s) when operating in USB Legacy Emulation mode. Back The following figure shows the back of computer. Figure 3-4 The back of the computer 1. Computer holder User's Manual 3-4 1 Computer holder The holder provides firm support to the computer. Underside The following figures show the underside of the computer. You should ensure that the display is closed before the computer is turned over to avoid causing any damage. Figure 3-5 The underside of the computer 1. Stereo speakers Stereo speakers The speakers emit sound generated by your software as well as audio alarms, such as low battery condition, generated by the system. Front with the display open This section shows the computer with the display panel open. In order to open the display, lift the display panel up and position it at a comfortable viewing angle for you. User's Manual 3-5 131 Figure 3-6 The front of the computer with the display panel open 1. Wireless communication antennas

(not shown) 2. Microphone*

3. Web Camera LED 4. Web Camera 5. Ambient light sensor (not shown) 6. Display screen 7. Computer holder 8. Release latch 9. Keyboard 10. Touch Pad 11. Touch Pad control button 12. Touch Pad control button 13. Windows button

* Provided with some models. Product appearance depends on the model you purchased. Wireless communication antennas Some computers in this series are equipped with the Wireless LAN/Bluetooth antennas. Legal Footnote (Wireless LAN) For more information regarding Wireless LAN, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section. Microphone Web Camera LED Web Camera The built-in microphone allows you to import and record sounds for your application - please refer to the Sound System and Video mode section for more information. The Web Camera LED glows when the Web Camera is operating. Web Camera is a device that allows you to record video or take photographs with your computer. You can use it for video chatting or video conferences using a communication tool. User's Manual 3-6 71689101112324513 Do not point the web camera directly at the sun. Do not touch or press strongly on the web camera lens. Doing so may reduce image quality. Use an eyeglass cleaner (cleaner cloth) or other soft cloth to clean the lens if it becomes dirty. Ambient light sensor Ambient light sensor can detect the light quality Display screen and intensity outside and can use this information to automatically adjust the display screen brightness. 33.78cm (13.3") LCD screen, configured with the following resolutions:

HD, 1366 horizontal x 768 vertical pixels Please be aware that, when the computer is operating on the AC adaptor, the image displayed on the internal screen will be somewhat brighter than when it operates on battery power. This difference in brightness levels is intended to save power when operating on batteries. Legal Footnote (LCD) For more information regarding LCD, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section. Keyboard Touch Pad Touch Pad control buttons Your computers keyboard contains character keys, control keys, function keys, and special Windows keys, providing all the functionality of a full-size keyboard. Refer to the The Keyboard section for details. The Touch Pad located in the palm rest is used to control the movement of the on-screen pointer. To use the Touch Pad, simply touch and move your fingertip across it in the direction you want the on-screen pointer to go. The two buttons below the Touch Pad are used like the buttons on a standard mouse - press the left button to select a menu item or to manipulate text or graphics designated by the pointer, and press the right button to display a menu or other function depending on the software you are using. User's Manual 3-7 Windows button Press this button to open the Start screen or, if already on the Start screen, returns you to your last app. Internal Hardware Components This section describes the internal hardware components of your computer. The actual specifications may vary depending on the model you purchased. Battery pack This computer includes one battery pack in the computer and another in the keyboard dock. However, please do not attempt to dismount or replace them by yourself. Please contact an authorized TOSHIBA service provider, if necessary. The rechargeable lithium-ion battery packs provide power to the computer when the AC adaptor is not connected. For more detailed information on the use and operation of the battery pack please refer to the Battery section. Legal Footnote (Battery Life) For more information regarding Battery Life, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section. CPU The processor type varies depending on model. To check which type of processor is included in your model, open the TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor utility by clicking Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Support & Recovery -> PC Health Monitor, and then click PC Information. Legal Footnote (CPU) For more information regarding CPU, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section. User's Manual 3-8 Hard Disk Drive or Solid State Drive The capacity of the hard disk drive varies depending on the model. To check which type of HDD/SSD is included in your model, open the TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor utility by clicking Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Support & Recovery -> PC Health Monitor, and then click PC Information. Please note that part of the hard disk's overall capacity is reserved as administration space. In this manual, the word "HDD" or "Hard disk drive" also refers to the SSD unless otherwise stated. SSD is a large-capacity storage media which uses Solid-State Memory in place of a magnetic disk of the hard disk. Under certain unusual conditions of prolonged non-use and/or exposure to high temperatures, the SSD may be vulnerable to data retention errors. Legal Footnote (Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity) For more information regarding Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section. RTC battery Video RAM The internal RTC battery backs up the Real Time Clock (RTC) and calendar. The memory in a computer's graphics adaptor, used to store the image displayed on a bitmap display. The amount of Video RAM available is dependent on the computer's system memory. Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Control Panel ->

Appearance and Personalization -> Display ->

Adjust resolution. The amount of Video RAM can be verified by clicking the Advanced settings button in the Screen Resolution window. Legal Footnote (Memory (Main System)) For more information regarding Memory (Main System), please refer to the Legal Footnotes section. User's Manual 3-9 Display controller The display controller interprets software commands into hardware commands that turn particular parts on the screen on or off. The display controller also controls the video mode and uses industry standard rules to govern the screen resolution and the maximum number of colors that can be displayed at a time. Therefore, software written for a given video mode will run on any computer that supports that mode. Legal Footnote (Graphics Processing Unit (GPU)) For more information regarding Graphics Processing Unit (GPU), please refer to the Legal Footnotes section. Power Condition Descriptions Power conditions The computer's operating capability and battery charge status are affected by different power conditions, including whether an AC adaptor is connected and what the charge level is for that battery. The LED in the table below refers to the DC IN/Battery indicator. Power on AC adaptor connected Battery fully charged Battery partially charged or no charge Operates No charge LED: white Operates Charge LED: amber Power off

(no operation) No charge LED: white Quick charge LED: amber User's Manual 3-10 Power off

(no operation) AC adaptor not connected Remaining battery capacity is above low battery trigger point Remaining battery capacity is below low battery trigger point Remaining battery capacity is exhausted Power on Operates LED: off Operates LED: flashes amber Computer shuts down DC IN/Battery indicator Check the DC IN/Battery indicator to determine the status of the battery pack and the power status with the AC adaptor connected. The following indicator conditions should be noted:

Flashing amber Amber White No light The battery charge is low. The AC adaptor must be connected in order to recharge the battery. Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the battery is charging. Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the battery is fully charged. Under any other conditions, the indicator does not light. If the battery pack becomes too hot while it is being charged, the charge will stop and the DC IN/Battery indicator will go out. When the battery pack's temperature falls to a normal range, charging will resume - this process will occur regardless of whether the computer's power is on or off. Power indicator Check the Power indicator to determine the power status of the computer -

the following indicator conditions should be noted:

White Indicates power is being supplied to the computer and the computer is turned on. User's Manual 3-11 Blinking white No light Indicates that the computer is in Sleep Mode and that there is sufficient power available (AC adaptor or battery) to maintain this condition. Under any other conditions, the indicator does not light. User's Manual 3-12 Chapter 4 Operating Basics This chapter describes the basic operations of your computer and highlights the precautions that should be taken when using it. Operating in Tablet Mode When operating the computer in tablet mode, follow the instructions below. Figure 4-1 Operating the computer Hold the computer firmly on your forearm. Do not block the vent. Remove the AC adaptor from the computer when using it held in your forearm. Do not use the computer while walking or driving a car. Do not expose the computer to rapid temperature changes (such as would be the case if you brought the computer from a cold environment into a warm room). When rapid temperature changes are unavoidable, leave the computer for around two hours before turning it on to prevent the formation of condensation. Remove all external peripheral devices and their connection cables from the computer before carrying. Do not drop the computer or apply excessive impact to it. Do not leave the computer in a car or similar environment where it is exposed to direct sunlight. Changing the screen orientation When operating the computer in tablet mode, you can change the screen orientation to Portrait mode by rotating the computer sideways. The screen orientation automatically changes according to the rotation angle detected. User's Manual 4-1 Figure 4-2 Rotating the computer sideways Avoid having direct contact with the other edges of the hand held device while the wireless device is turned on and transmitting. Only factories installed wireless transmitter can be used with this hand held device to satisfy RF exposure compliance. In the Portrait mode, some drivers/utilities may not perform install and uninstall operation. If it occurs, switch to the Landscape mode to proceed. Using the Touch Screen You can use your finger to manipulate icons, buttons, menu items, the on-

screen keyboard, and other items on the touch screen. Tap Simply tap your finger once on the touch screen to activate an item, such as an app. Press and hold Pinch or stretch Rotate Slide Press your finger down and leave it there for a few seconds until a white square appears. This will show information to help you learn more about an item or will open a menu specific to what you are doing. Touch the screen or an item with two or more fingers, and then move the fingers toward each other (pinch) or away from each other (stretch). This will show different levels of information or visually zooms in or out. Put two or more fingers on an item and then turn your hand to rotate things in the direction you turn your hand. Only some items can be rotated. Drag your finger on the touch screen to move through what's on the screen. User's Manual 4-2 Swipe to select Quickly slide down an item with your finger, such as an app tile to select it. This usually opens the app commands. Swipe from edge Quickly move your finger in from the edge of the screen, without pausing when you first touch it. Swipe from the left edge: shows your recently opened apps, and so on. Swipe from the right edge: opens or closes the Charms (Search, Share, Start, Devices, Settings). Swipe from the top or bottom edge: opens or closes the app command bar. For details and more advanced touch screen gestures to interact with Windows 8, please refer to Help and Support. Do not press or push with excess force on the touch screen. Do not apply excess force when cleaning the touch screen. Never touch the screen with a sharp object such as a ball-point pen which may scratch or damage the surface. Using the Touch Pad The Touch Pad located on the TOSHIBA Keyboard Dock may support the following gestures:

Tap Tap once on the Touch Pad to activate an item, such as an app. Two-Finger Tap Pinch or stretch Tap once on the Touch Pad with two fingers together to display a menu or other function depending on the software you are using.

(Similar to right-click) Place two or more fingers down on the Touch Pad and move them toward each other (pinch) or away from each other (stretch). This will show different levels of information or visually zooms in or out. User's Manual 4-3 Two-Finger Scroll Swipe Place two fingers down and slide them vertically or horizontally from anywhere on the Touch Pad. This allows you to operate the scroll bars of a window. Quickly move your finger in from the edge of the Touch Pad, without pausing when you first touch it. Swipe from the left edge: shows your recently opened apps. Swipe from the right edge: opens or closes the charms (Search, Share, Start, Devices, Settings). Swipe from the top edge: opens or closes the app command bar. Some of the Touch Pad operations described in this section are only supported in certain applications. The Keyboard The number of keys available on the keyboard dock will depend on which country/region your computer is configured for, with keyboards being available for numerous languages. There are different types of keys, specifically typewriter keys, function keys, Windows special keys and the keypad overlay. Never remove the key caps on your keyboard. Doing so could cause damage to the parts under the key caps. Keyboard indicator The following figure shows the position of the CAPS LOCK indicator which shows the following conditions:

When the CAPS LOCK indicator glows, the keyboard will produce capitals when any letter is typed. User's Manual 4-4 Figure 4-3 CAPS LOCK indicator 1. CAPS LOCK indicator CAPS LOCK Function Key This indicator glows green when letter keys are locked into their uppercase format. The function keys (F1 ~ F12) are the twelve keys at the top of your keyboard. You can configure the function keys Mode as "Special function mode" or

"Standard F1-F12 mode" by clicking Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Tools

& Utilities -> System Settings -> Keyboard.

"Special function mode" allows you to use special functions without pressing the FN key. Special function mode F1 Standard F1-

F12 mode FN + F1 Function F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 FN + F2 FN + F3 FN + F4 FN + F5 FN + F6 FN + F7 FN + F8 Launches the help file supplied with the software. Decreases the computer's display panel brightness in individual steps. Increases the computer's display panel brightness in individual steps. Changes the active display device. To use a simultaneous mode, you must set the resolution of the internal display panel to match the resolution of the external display device. Enables or disables the Touch Pad. Moves media backward. Plays or pauses media playback. Moves media forward. User's Manual 4-5 1 Special function mode F9 F10 F11 F12 FN + 1 Standard F1-

F12 mode FN + F9 FN + F10 FN + F11 FN + F12 FN + 1 FN + 2 FN + 2 FN + Space FN + Z FN + Space FN + Z Function Decreases the computer's volume. Increases the computer's volume. Turns the sound on or off. Turns the Airplane mode on or off. Reduces the icon size on the desktop or the font sizes within one of the supported application windows. Enlarges the icon size on the desktop or the font sizes within one of the supported application windows. Changes the display resolution. Turns the keyboard backlight on or off. This function is supported with some models. Some functions will show the toast notification at the edges of the screen. Those toast notifications are disabled at factory default. You can enable them in the Function Key application. To access it, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Tools & Utilities ->

Function Key. Windows special keys The keyboard provides two keys that have special functions in Windows, the Windows Start Button key activates the Start screen while the application key has the same function as the secondary (right) mouse button. This key activates the Windows Start screen. This key has the same function as the secondary (right) mouse button. Touch keyboard Touch keyboard is an on-screen virtual keyboard allowing you to type on the touch screen. Touch keyboard provides a full-size keyboard, a thumb keyboard with keys split on either side of the screen and it can also switch to a handwriting panel. User's Manual 4-6 To use the touch keyboard, tap in an area where you can type. The keyboard will open automatically. To manually open the touch keyboard, please follow either of the below:

In the Settings charm, click Keyboard -> Touch keyboard and handwriting panel. Click the keyboard icon (

desktop.

) in the taskbar of your Windows Battery This section explains battery types, use, recharging methods and handling. Battery types The computer has different types of batteries. Battery pack When the AC adaptor is not connected, the computer's main power source are two lithium ion batteries, also referred to in this manual as the main battery. Real Time Clock (RTC) battery The Real Time Clock (RTC) battery provides power for the internal real time clock and calendar function and also maintains the system configuration while the computer is turned off. If the RTC battery becomes completely discharged, the system will lose this information and the real time clock and calendar will stop working. You can change the Real Time Clock settings in the BIOS setup utility. Please refer to TOSHIBA Setup Utility section for further information. The RTC battery does not charge while the computer is turned off even if the AC adaptor is attached. Care and use of the battery pack This section provides the important safety precautions in order to handle your battery packs properly. Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for detailed precautions and handling instructions. The computer's RTC battery is a Ni-MH battery and should be replaced only by your dealer or by a TOSHIBA service representative. The battery can explode if not properly replaced, used, handled or disposed. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. User's Manual 4-7 Charge the battery pack only in an ambient temperature between 5 and 35 degrees Celsius. Otherwise, the electrolyte solution might leak, battery pack performance might deteriorate and the battery life might be shortened. Charging the batteries When the power in the battery pack becomes low, the DC IN/Battery indicator will flash amber to indicate that only a few minutes of battery power remain. If you continue to use the computer while the DC IN/Battery indicator flashes, the computer will enable Hibernation Mode so that you do not lose any data, and automatically turn itself off. You must recharge a battery pack when it becomes discharged. Procedures To recharge a battery pack, connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack and plug the other end into a working outlet - the DC IN/Battery indicator will glow amber while the battery is being charged. Charging Time The following table shows the approximate time required to fully charge a discharged battery. Tablet mode Battery type Battery pack (23.56Wh, 2 cell) - Tablet RTC battery Power on about 4.5 hours Power off about 4.5 hours Doesnt charge about 24 hours Laptop mode Battery type Battery pack (23.56Wh, 2 cell) - Tablet Battery pack (23.56Wh, 2 cell) - TOSHIBA Keyboard Dock RTC battery Power off about 4.5 hours Power on about 4.5 hours about 4.5 hours about 4.5 hours Doesnt charge about 24 hours Please be aware that the charging time when the computer is on is affected by ambient temperature, the temperature of the computer and how you are User's Manual 4-8 using the computer - if you make heavy use of external devices for example, the battery might scarcely charge at all during operation. Battery charging notice The battery may not begin charging immediately under the following conditions:

The battery is extremely hot or cold (if the battery is extremely hot, it might not charge at all). To ensure the battery charges to its full capacity, you should charge it at room temperature of between 5C to 35C (41F to 95F). The battery is nearly completely discharged. In this instance you should leave the AC adaptor connected for a few minutes and the battery should begin charging. The DC IN/Battery indicator may show a rapid decrease in battery operating time when you try to charge a battery under the following conditions:

The battery has not been used for a long time. The battery has completely discharged and been left in the computer for a long time. In such cases you should follow the steps as detailed below:

1. Fully discharge the battery by leaving it in the computer with the power on until the system automatically turns itself off. 2. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack of the computer, and to a wall outlet that is supplying power. 3. Charge the battery until the DC IN/Battery indicator glows white. Repeat these steps two or three times until the battery recovers normal capacity. Monitoring battery capacity Remaining battery power can be monitored using the following methods. Clicking the battery icon on the Taskbar Via the Battery Status in the Windows Mobility Center window You should wait at least 16 seconds after turning on the computer before trying to monitor the remaining operating time. This is because the computer needs this time to check the battery's remaining capacity and then calculate the remaining operating time, based on this together with the current power consumption. Please be aware that the actual remaining operating time may differ slightly from the calculated time. User's Manual 4-9 With repeated discharges and recharges, the battery's capacity will gradually decrease. In view of this it will be noted that an often used, older battery will not operate for as long as a new battery even when both are fully charged. Maximizing battery operating time A battery's usefulness depends on how long it can supply power on a single charge, while how long the charge lasts in a battery depends on:

Processor speed Screen brightness System Sleep Mode System Hibernation Mode Display power off period Solid State Drive power off period How often and for how long you use the Solid State Drive and external disk drives. How much charge the battery contained to begin with. How you use optional devices, such as a USB device, to which the battery supplies power. Whether you enable Sleep Mode, which can conserve battery power if you are frequently turning the computer off and on. Where you store your programs and data. Whether you close the display panel when you are not using the keyboard - closing the display saves power. The environmental temperature - operating time decreases at low temperatures. Batteries exhausted time When you turn off the power of your computer with batteries fully charged, the batteries will be exhausted within the following approximate period (in tablet mode). Tablet mode Battery type Battery pack (23.56Wh, 2 cell) RTC battery Shut Down Mode about 45 days Sleep Mode about 3 days about 30 days about 90 days Laptop mode User's Manual 4-10 Battery type Two battery packs

(23.56Wh, 2 cell) RTC battery Sleep Mode about 5 days Shut Down Mode about 45 days about 30 days about 90 days Extending battery life To maximize the life of your battery packs:

At least once a month, disconnect the computer from a power source and operate it on battery power until the battery pack fully discharges. Before doing so, follow the steps as detailed below. 1. Turn off the computer's power. 2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and turn on the computer's power - if it does not turn on then go to Step 4. 3. Operate the computer on battery power for five minutes. If you find that the battery pack has at least five minutes of operating time, continue operating until the battery pack is fully discharged, however, if the DC IN/Battery indicator flashes or there is some other warning to indicate a low battery condition, go to Step 4. 4. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack of the computer, and to a wall outlet that is supplying power. The DC IN/Battery indicator should glow amber to indicate that the battery pack is being charged, however, in the event that DC IN/Battery indicator does not glow this indicates that power is not being supplied - check the connections for the AC adaptor and the power cord. 5. Charge the battery pack until the DC IN/Battery indicator glows white. Memory media The computer is equipped with a memory media slot that can accommodate some kinds of memory media with various memory capacities so that you can easily transfer data from devices, such as digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants. Keep foreign objects out of the memory media slot. Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer or Keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury. User's Manual 4-11 This Memory media slot supports the following memory media:

Secure Digital (SD) Card (microSD/SDHC/SDXC Card). Please note that not all memory media have been tested and verified to work correctly. Therefore, it is not possible to guarantee that all memory media will operate properly. Memory media This section provides the important safety precautions in order to handle your memory media. Points to note about microSD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards microSD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards comply with SDMI (Secure Digital Music Initiative), which is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or playback of digital music. For this reason, you cannot copy or playback protected material on other device, and you may not reproduce any copyrighted material except for your personal enjoyment. The supported maximum capacity of memory card is 64GB. Memory media format New media cards are formatted according to specific standards. If you wish to reformat a media card, be sure to do so with a device that uses media cards. Formatting microSD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards microSD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards are sold already formatted in conformity to specific standards. If you reformat an microSD/SDHC/SDXC memory card, be sure to reformat it with a device such as digital camera or digital audio player that uses microSD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards, not with the format command provided within Windows. Should you need to format all areas of the memory card, including the protected area, you will need to obtain an appropriate application that applies the copy protection system. Media care Observe the following precautions when handling the card. Do not twist or bend cards. Do not expose cards to liquids or store in humid areas or lay media close to containers of liquid. Do not touch the metal part of a card or expose it to liquids or let it get dirty. User's Manual 4-12 After using card, return it to its case. The card is designed so that it can be inserted only one way. Do not try to force the card into the slot. Do not leave a card partially inserted in the slot. Press the card until you hear it click into place. Memory cards have a limited lifespan, so it is important to backup important data. Do not write to a card if the battery power is low. Low power could affect writing accuracy. Do not remove a card while read/write is in progress. For more details on using memory cards, see manuals accompanying the cards. Inserting memory media The following instructions apply to all types of supported media devices. To insert memory media, follow the steps as detailed below:

1. 2. Turn the memory media so that the contacts (metal areas) face up. Insert the memory media into the memory media slot on the right side of the computer. Figure 4-4 Inserting memory media 1. Memory media slot 2. Memory media Make sure the memory media is oriented properly before you insert it. If you insert the media in wrong direction, you may not be able to remove it. When inserting the memory media, do not touch the metal contacts. You could expose the storage area to static electricity, which can destroy data. Do not turn the computer off or switch to Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode while files are being copied - doing so may cause data to be lost. 3. Push the memory media gently until you hear a click. User's Manual 4-13 21 Removing memory media The following instructions apply to all types of supported media devices. To remove memory media, follow the steps as detailed below:

1. Click the Desktop tile and open the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon on the Windows Taskbar. 2. Point to memory media and click the left Touch Pad control button. 3. Push the memory media until you hear a click to partially release it. 4. Grasp it and pull it out of the slot. If you remove the memory media or turn off the power while the computer is accessing the memory media, you may lose data or damage the media. Do not remove the memory media while the computer is in Sleep or Hibernation Mode. The computer could become unstable or data in the memory media could be lost. Do not remove only the miniSD/microSD Card while leaving the adaptor in the memory media slot. External display Your computer video capabilities can be enhanced with additional displays. External displays allows you to share your desktop or extend the desktop area. Connecting an external display Your computer comes with a built-in display, but you can also connect other external displays via available ports on the computer. The HDMI port HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) port digitally transfers both video and audio data without reducing the quality. HDMI-compatible external display devices including televisions can be connected via the HDMI port. To connect an HDMI-compatible display device, follow the steps as detailed below:

As the port operation of all HDMI display devices have not been confirmed, some HDMI display devices may not function properly. To connect a device to the HDMI port, you must purchase an HDMI cable. 1. Plug one end of the HDMI cable into the HDMI port of your HDMI 2. Plug the other end of the HDMI cable into the micro HDMI port on your display device. computer. User's Manual 4-14 Figure 4-5 Connecting the HDMI port on the computer 1. Micro HDMI port 2. HDMI cable (Type D connector) Please do not plug/unplug an HDMI display device under the following conditions:

The system is starting up. The system is shutting down. When you connect a television or external monitor to the HDMI port, the display output device is set to HDMI. When you unplug the HDMI cable and re-plug it, please wait at least 5 seconds before you re-plug the HDMI cable again. When you change the display output device, the playback device may not switch automatically. In this case, in order to set the playback device to the same device as the display output device, please adjust the playback device manually by the following steps:

1. Click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Sound. 2. In the Playback tab, select the playback device which you want to switch to. 3. To use the internal speakers on your computer, select Speakers. To use the television or the external monitor that you have connected to the computer, select a different playback device. 4. Click the Set Default button. 5. Click OK to close the Sound dialog. Settings for display video on HDMI To view video on the HDMI display device, be sure to configure the following settings otherwise you may find that nothing is displayed. Be sure to use the function key to select the display device before starting to play video. Do not change the display device while playing video. Do not change the display device under the following conditions. While data is being read or written. While communication is being carried out. User's Manual 4-15 21 Selecting HD Format To select the display mode, follow the steps as detailed below:

1. Click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Control Panel. 2. Click Appearance and Personalization. 3. Click Display. 4. Click Change display settings. 5. Click Advanced settings. 6. Click List All Modes. 7. Select one of the mode at List All Modes. Changing the display settings After one or more external displays are connected, the operating system can automatically detect, identify and setup the display settings. You can also manually manage how the external displays will work and change the display settings by pressing P while holding down the Windows (

the computer's power off, be sure to switch to the internal display.

) key. If you disconnect the external display before you turn Optional TOSHIBA Accessories You are able to add a number of options and accessories in order to make your computer even more powerful and convenient to use. For reference, the following list details some of the items that are available from your reseller or TOSHIBA dealer:

Universal AC Adaptor If you frequently use your computer at more than one site, it may be convenient to purchase an additional AC adaptor to be kept at each site in order to remove the need to always carry the adaptor with you. Not all the accessories are available in your region. Please contact your reseller or TOSHIBA dealer for more information. Sound System and Video mode This section describes some of the audio control functions. Volume Mixer The Volume Mixer utility lets you control the audio volume for playback of devices and applications under Windows. To launch the Volume Mixer utility, click Desktop and right click on the speaker icon on the Taskbar, and then select Open Volume Mixer from the sub menu. User's Manual 4-16 To adjust the volume level of speakers or headphones, move the Speakers slider. To adjust the volume level of an application that you are using, move the slider for the corresponding application. Microphone Level Follow the steps below to change the microphone recording level. 1. Right click on the speaker icon on the Taskbar, and select Recording devices from the sub menu. 2. Select Microphone, and click Properties. 3. On the Levels tab move the Microphone slider to increase or decrease the microphone volume level. If you feel the microphone volume level is inadequate, move the Microphone Boost slider to a higher level. Audio Enhancements In order to apply the sound effects for your current speaker, follow the steps below. 1. Click Desktop and right click on the Speakers icon on the Taskbar, and then select Playback devices from the sub menu. 2. Select Speakers, and click Properties. 3. On the Enhancements tab select the sound effects you would like, and click Apply. Realtek HD Audio Manager You can confirm and change the audio configuration using the Realtek HD Audio Manager. To launch the Realtek HD Audio Manager:

Click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Realtek HD Audio Manager. When you first launch the Realtek HD Audio Manager, you will see two device tabs. Speakers is the default output device. Microphone is the default input device. To change the default device, click the Set Default Device button under the chosen device tab. Information Click the Information button information, and language setting. to view hardware information, software Power Management The audio controller in your computer can be turned off when the audio function is not used. To adjust the configuration of audio power management, click the Power Management button

. User's Manual 4-17 When audio power management is enabled, the circle button at the upper left of the Power Management is blue and convex. When audio power management is disabled, the button is black and concave. Speaker Configuration Click the Auto Test button headphone sound is coming from the right direction. to confirm the internal speakers or the Default Format You can change the sample rate and bit depth of sound. DTS Sound DTS Sound utilizes advanced patented techniques to retrieve audio cues buried in the original source material and deliver immersive surround sound complete with deep, rich bass and crystal clear dialog. DTS Sound is provided with some models. It provides the following features:

Immersive surround sound with bass and dialog enhancement Broad sweet spot with elevated sound image Improved volume output delivering maximum volume without creating clipping or distortion Dialog enhancement for clear and intelligible vocals Bass enhancement for rich, low frequency production High frequency definition for crisp details To access the utility, Click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Media &

Entertainment -> DTS Sound. U.S. patents apply to this product. See http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. Video mode Video mode settings are configured via the Screen Resolution dialog. To open the Screen Resolution dialog, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -

> Control Panel -> Appearance and Personalization -> Display ->

Change display settings. If you are running some applications (for example a 3D application or video playback), you may see some disturbance, flickering or frame dropping on your screen. If that occurs, adjust the resolution of display, lowering it until the screen is displayed properly. User's Manual 4-18 Chapter 5 Utilities and Advanced Usage This chapter describes the utilities and special features of this computer, and the advanced usage of some utilities. Utilities and Applications This section describes the pre-installed utilities that come with the computer and details how to start them. For further information on their operation, you may refer to each utility's online manual, help files or README.TXT file (if applicable). All the utilities described here can be accessed from Desktop -> Desktop Assist. Furthermore, some utilities can also be launched from Start screen and desktop shortcut. TOSHIBA Desktop Assist TOSHIBA Desktop Assist is a graphical user interface that provides access to specific tools and TOSHIBA utilities and applications that make the use and configuration of the computer easier. To access this utility, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist. User's Manual 5-1 TOSHIBA Display Utility TOSHIBA Password Utility TOSHIBA System Settings TOSHIBA HDD Accelerator TOSHIBA Setup Utility TOSHIBA Display Utility includes Desktop Text Size utility, Split Screen utility and Other Settings. Desktop Text Size allows you to make the text size bigger or smaller on the desktop according to your usage and favorite. You can change the text size on the display and on the title bar of windows by changing the scaling of the text size. When the scaling is smaller, more information will appear on the display simultaneously but the text size becomes smaller. When the scaling is larger, less information will appear on the display simultaneously but the text size becomes larger. You can install Split Screen utility by yourself. Split Screen utility enables you to create multiple display zones on a screen and to fit the active windows to within those zones. To access this utility, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Tools & Utilities -> Display Utility. For details on Desktop Text Size utility and Split Screen utility, see the help file. This utility allows you to set a password in order to restrict access to the computer. To access this utility, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Tools & Utilities -> Password Utility. This utility allows you to customize your hardware settings according to the way you work with the computer and the peripherals you use. To access this utility, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Tools & Utilities -> System Settings. For more information, please refer to the TOSHIBA Setup Utility section. TOSHIBA HDD Accelerator is a utility that can improve hard drive access performance by using part of the main memory of the computer as a cache. To access this utility, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Tools & Utilities -> System Settings -

> HDD Accelerator. TOSHIBA Setup Utility is a BIOS setup utility that provides you a menu-based user interface so that you can easily view and change BIOS settings. For more information, please refer to the TOSHIBA Setup Utility section. User's Manual 5-2 TOSHIBA eco Utility TOSHIBA Media Player by sMedio TrueLink+

TOSHIBA Function Key TOSHIBA Service Station This computer is equipped with "eco mode". This mode slightly lowers performance of some devices to reduce electric power consumption. You can realize measurable power savings by using it continuously. TOSHIBA eco Utility helps control the power consumption of your computer. Various information can help you understand your degree of contribution to the environment. Furthermore, this utility contains Peak shift function that can help reduce power usage during periods of peak demand by shifting some power consumption to periods when demand is lower. To access this utility, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Tools & Utilities -> eco Utility. For details on TOSHIBA eco utility, see the help file. This software is a multimedia player which can be used to play back video, music and photo. TOSHIBA Media Player can play back contents on a local library/home network/SkyDrive. To access it, click the Media Player icon on the Start screen. For details, please refer to the Tutorial. This utility allows you to perform some features by pressing a specified key or combined with the FN key. To setup this utility, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Tools & Utilities -> Function Key. For details, please refer to the section. This application allows your computer to automatically search for TOSHIBA software updates or other alerts from TOSHIBA that are specific to your computer system and its programs. When enabled, this application periodically transmits to our servers a limited amount of system information, which will be treated in strict accordance with the rules and regulations as well as applicable data protection law. To access this utility, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Support & Recovery -> Service Station. User's Manual 5-3 TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor TOSHIBA Resolution+

Plug-in for Windows Media Player TOSHIBA Audio Enhancement The TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor application proactively monitors a number of system functions such as power consumption, battery health and system cooling, informing you of significant system conditions. This application recognizes the system and individual component serial numbers and will track specific activities related to their usage. To access this utility, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Support & Recovery -> PC Health Monitor. For details on TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor, see the help file. The plug-in lets you upconverts wmv and mp4 videos on Windows Media Player. For more information, please refer to the TOSHIBA Resolution+ Plug-in for Windows Media Player Help. To access it, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -

> Media & Entertainment -> TOSHIBA Resolution+ Plug-in for Windows Media Player - Help. TOSHIBA Audio Enhancement provides you the function of audio source filtering, earphone audio enhancement, or speaker audio enhancement. To change the settings, click Desktop ->

Desktop Assist -> Media & Entertainment ->

Audio Enhancement. You may not have all the software listed above depending on the model you purchased. To access the setup files of the drivers/utilities, type Applications from the Start screen, and then click Applications and Drivers from the list that appears. TOSHIBA Media Player by sMedio TrueLink+ application is not included in the setup files above but can be downloaded from Windows Store. Special features The following features are either unique to TOSHIBA computers or are advanced features which make the computer more convenient to use. Access each function using the following procedures.

*1 To access the Power Options, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist ->

Control Panel -> System and Security -> Power Options. User's Manual 5-4 Display automatic power off *1 SSD automatic power off *1 System automatic Sleep/Hibernation Mode *1 Power on password Intelligent power supply *1 This feature automatically cuts off power to the computer's display panel when there is no keyboard input for a specified time, with power being restored the next time a key is pressed. This can be specified in the Power Options. This feature automatically cuts off power to the Solid State Drive when it is not accessed for a specified time, with power being restored when the Solid State Drive is next accessed. This can be specified in the Power Options. This feature automatically shuts down the system into either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode when there is no input or hardware access for a specified time. This can be specified in the Power Options. Two levels of password security, supervisor and user, are available to prevent unauthorized access to your computer. A microprocessor in the computer's intelligent power supply detects the battery's charge, automatically calculates the remaining battery capacity and protects electronic components from abnormal conditions such as a voltage overload from the AC adaptor. This can be specified in the Power Options. Battery save mode *1 This feature lets you configure the computer in order to save battery power. This can be specified in the Power Options. Panel power on/off *1 This feature automatically turns power to the Low battery automatic Hibernation Mode *1 Sleep Mode computer off when the display panel is closed, and turns it back on when the display panel is opened. This can be specified in the Power Options. When battery power is exhausted to the point that computer operation cannot be continued, the system automatically enters Hibernation Mode and shuts itself down. This can be specified in the Power Options. If you have to interrupt your work, you can use this feature to allow you to turn off power to the computer without exiting from your software. Data is maintained in the computer's main memory so that when you next turn on the power, you can continue working right where you left off. User's Manual 5-5 Hibernation Mode This feature lets you turn off the power to the computer without exiting from your software. The contents of main memory are automatically saved to the Solid State Drive so that when you next turn the power on again, you can continue working right where you left off. Refer to the Turning off the power section, for more details. USB Wakeup function This function restores the computer from Sleep Heat dispersal *1 Mode depending on the external devices connected to the USB ports. For example, if a mouse or USB keyboard is connected to a USB port, clicking the mouse button or pressing the keyboard will wakeup the computer. To protect against overheating, the processor is equipped with an internal temperature sensor which activates a cooling fan or lowers the processing speed if the computer's internal temperature rises to a certain level. You are able to select whether to control this temperature by either turning on the fan first, then if necessary lowering the processor speed, or by lowering the processor speed first, then if necessary turning on the fan. Both of these functions are controlled through the Power Options. When the processor's temperature falls within normal range, the fan and the processor operation will return to its standard speed. If the processor's temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with either setting, the computer automatically shuts down to prevent any damage. In this instance all unsaved data in memory will be lost. TOSHIBA Password Utility The TOSHIBA Password Utility provides two levels of password security:

User and Supervisor. Passwords set by the TOSHIBA Password Utility function are different from the Windows password. User Password To start the utility, click the following items:

User's Manual 5-6 Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Tools & Utilities -> Password Utility ->

User Password User authentication may be required to validate user rights when using TOSHIBA Password Utility to delete or change passwords, etc. Set (button) Click this button to register a password. After a password is set, you will be prompted to enter it when you start the computer. After you set the password, a dialog box will be displayed asking whether you want to save it to other media. If you forget the password, you can open the password file on another computer. Be sure to keep the media in a safe place. When entering the character string to register the password, enter from the keyboard character by character and do not enter as ASCII code or copy-and-paste the character string. In addition, ensure that the registered password is correct by outputting the character string to the password file. When entering a password, do not enter any characters (for example

"!" or "#") produced by pressing the SHIFT or ALT keys. Delete (button) Click this button to delete a registered password. Before you can delete a password, you must first enter the current password correctly. Change (button) Click this button to change a registered password. Before you can change a password, you must first enter the current password correctly. Owner String (text box) You can use this box to associate text with the password. After you enter text, click Apply or OK. When the computer is started, this text will be displayed together with the prompt asking you to enter a password. You can launch the BIOS setup utility to set, change or delete the HDD Password or HDD Master Password. Please refer to TOSHIBA Setup Utility section for further information. If you forget your HDD User Password, TOSHIBA will NOT be able to assist you, and your HDD will be rendered COMPLETELY and PERMANENTLY INOPERABLE. TOSHIBA will NOT be held responsible for any loss of any data, any loss of use or access to your HDD, or for any other losses to you or any other person or organization that result from the loss of access to your HDD. If you cant accept this risk, dont register the HDD User Password. User's Manual 5-7 When saving the HDD User Password shut down or restart the computer. If the computer is not shut down or restarted, the saved data may not be correctly reflected. For more information on shutting down or restarting the computer, refer to Turning on the power. Supervisor Password If you set a Supervisor Password, some functions might be restricted when a user logs on with the User Password. To set a Supervisor Password:

Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Tools & Utilities -> Password Utility ->

Supervisor Password This utility lets you do the following:

Register or delete the Supervisor Password. Specify restrictions for general users. Starting the computer using a password If you have already registered a user password, there is one way to start the computer:

Enter the password manually. The password is necessary only if the computer was shut down in Hibernation mode or boot mode. It is not needed in Sleep mode and Restart. To enter a password manually, follow the steps as detailed below:

1. Turn on the power as described in the Getting Started section. The following message will appear in the screen:

Password=

At this point, the function keys do not work. They will function after you enter the password. 2. Enter the Password. 3. Press ENTER. If you enter the password incorrectly three times in a row, or if you dont enter the password within 1 minute, the computer shuts off. In this case, some features that can power on the computer automatically (Wake-up on LAN, Task Scheduler, etc) may not work. You must turn the computer back on to retry password entry. TOSHIBA System Settings TOSHIBA System Settings is the TOSHIBA configuration management tool available through the Windows operating system. User's Manual 5-8 To run TOSHIBA System Settings, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist ->

Tools & Utilities -> System Settings. The TOSHIBA System Settings window contains a number of tabs to allow specific functions of the computer to be configured. In addition there are also three buttons: OK, Cancel and Apply. OK Accepts your changes and closes the TOSHIBA System Settings window. Closes the window without accepting your changes. Accepts all your changes without closing the TOSHIBA System Settings window. Cancel Apply Some options shown in grey are possible to confirm their status. TOSHIBA System Settings screen may have the following tabs:

GeneralAllows you to view the current BIOS version or change certain settings back to their default values Sleep and ChargeAllows you to set advanced features for sleep mode, hibernate mode, and shutdown state. DisplayAllows you to select the internal LCD and/or external monitor when the computer boots up Boot OptionsAllows you to change the sequence in which your computer searches the drives for the operating system KeyboardAllows you to access the wake-on keyboard function, or to configure the function keys USBAllows you to set conditions for USB SATAAllows you to set conditions for SATA LANAllows you to set conditions for LAN The settings or options explained here may vary depending on the model you purchased. After you changed the settings, a dialog box may appear to prompt you that the changes will take effect after the computer is restarted. Make sure to restart your computer immediately to apply these changes. TOSHIBA Media Player by sMedio TrueLink+

Please be aware of the following limitations when you use the TOSHIBA Media Player by sMedio TrueLink+:

Notes on use This software is a multimedia player which can be used to play back video, music and photo. User's Manual 5-9 It is recommended that the AC adaptor be connected while TOSHIBA Media Player is running. Power saving features may interfere with smooth playback. When TOSHIBA Media Player is used with a battery power, set the Power Options to "Balance". The screen saver is disabled while TOSHIBA Media Player is playing a video file or slideshows of photos. The computer will not enter Sleep, Hibernation and shut-down mode automatically, while TOSHIBA Media Player is running. The display automatic power off function is disabled while TOSHIBA Media Player is playing a video file or slideshows of photos. The Resolution+ function was specially adjusted for the internal monitor. Hence, please turn OFF Resolution+ when viewing on external monitor. Playback of high bit rate content may cause frame dropping, audio skipping or decrease in computer performance. The above problems could be remedied by turning Resolution+ off. Tap/click the Refresh button on app commands to refresh the content displayed on Library Screen. It wont be refreshed automatically. If sleep, hibernation, shutdown or reboot operation is in process during uploading the files to SkyDrive, the operation will not be properly completed. This app doesnt support to playback content protected by DRM. If you try to play DRM protected content with Resolution+ On state, this app may be closed. Photos uploaded to SkyDrive are limited to a maximum resolution of 2048 x 2048 pixels. Any photo over that resolution will be scaled proportionally to a maximum size of 2048 x 2048 pixels. This app doesn't support DMS. The playback of some media files may not be normal by this player. This may also happen when using Windows Media Player and Video app. Operating TOSHIBA Media Player by sMedio TrueLink+

The steps for playing a video file on a local library:

1. Click My Local Library on the Start Page of TOSHIBA Media Player. 2. Click a video file to playback. The steps for playing a music file on a local library:

1. Click My Local Library on the Start Page of TOSHIBA Media Player. 2. Click Music in the upper-left corner of the screen. 3. Select an artist icon or album icon for playback. 4. Click a music file to playback. The steps for playing a photo file on a local library:

1. Click My Local Library on the Start Page of TOSHIBA Media Player. 2. Click Photos in the upper-left corner of the screen. User's Manual 5-10 3. Select a folder icon or date icon for playback. 4. Click a photo file to playback. Opening TOSHIBA Media Player by sMedio TrueLink+

Manual The features and operations about TOSHIBA Media Player are explained in the TOSHIBA Media Player Manual. Use the following procedure to open TOSHIBA Media Player Manual:

Click the Tutorials icon on the Start Page of TOSHIBA Media Player. Use the following procedure to open TOSHIBA Media Player Online help:

When TOSHIBA Media Player is running, click Help of the Settings charm. TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor The TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor application proactively monitors a number of system functions such as power consumption, battery health and the system cooling, informing you of significant system conditions. This application recognizes the system and individual component serial numbers, and will track specific activities related to the computer and their usage. The collected information includes device operation time and number of actuations or status changes (i.e.: number of power button and FN key combination uses, AC adaptor, battery, LCD, fan, HDD, sound volume, wireless communication functionalities and USB information), date of initial system use, and also computer and device usage (i.e.: power settings, battery temperature and recharging, CPU, memory, backlight illumination time, and temperatures for various devices). The stored data uses a very small portion of the total Solid State Drive capacity, approximately 10MB or less per year. This information is used to identify and provide a notification of system conditions which may effect the performance of your TOSHIBA computer. It may also be used to help diagnose problems should the computer require service by TOSHIBA or TOSHIBA's authorized service providers. Additionally, TOSHIBA may also use this information for quality assurance analysis. Subject to the use restrictions above, the HDD data logged may be transferred to entities located outside of your country or region of residence

(e.g., European Union). Those countries may or may not have the same data protection laws or data protection levels as required by your home country or region. Once enabled, you may disable the TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor at any time by uninstalling the software via Uninstall a program in the Control Panel. Doing so will automatically delete all collected information from the HDD/SSD. User's Manual 5-11 The TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor software does not extend or modify TOSHIBA's obligations under its standard limited warranty in any way. TOSHIBA's standard limited warranty terms and limitations apply. Starting the TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor The TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor can be started by clicking Desktop ->

Desktop Assist -> Support & Recovery -> PC Health Monitor. The TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor main screen will be displayed and on clicking Please click here to enable TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor, the

"PC Health Monitor Software Notice & Acceptance" screen will be displayed. Please carefully read the information displayed. Selecting ACCEPT and clicking OK will enable the program. By enabling the TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor software, you agree with these terms and conditions and to the use and sharing of the collected information. Once the program is enabled, the TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor screen is displayed, and the program will begin monitoring system functions and collecting information. A message will be displayed if any changes which may interfere with the operation of the program are detected. Follow the instructions displayed on screen in the message. TOSHIBA Setup Utility TOSHIBA Setup Utility is a BIOS setup utility that provides you a menu-

based user interface so that you can easily view and change BIOS settings. To enter the BIOS setup utility, follow the steps below:

1. Save your work. 2. 3. Hold down the Volume down button until TOSHIBA Setup Utility is In the Settings charm, click Power and then select Restart. loaded. If TOSHIBA Keyboard Dock is connected, the BIOS setup utility can also be launched through the keyboard operation. 1. Save your work. 2. 3. Hold down the F2 key and then release this key one second after the In the Settings charm, click Power and then select Restart. computer is power on. To save the changes and exit the utility, press the F10 key and proceed by selecting Yes with the keyboard dock or select Exit -> Exit Saving Changes -> Yes. The computer will restart immediately. Navigating the utility TOSHIBA Setup Utility can be navigated through the touch screen. User's Manual 5-12 Some buttons on the computer are also designated to execute the corresponding key function on the keyboard dock. Details are described as follows:

Button Windows Key Enter key Volume up Volume down Orientation lock Up arrow key Down arrow key

-

Function Proceed or confirm operation Select an item Select an item Turn on/off the virtual on-

screen keyboard USB Charge Your computer can supply USB Bus power (DC5V) to the USB port. The port with the icon (

the following feature:

) (hereinafter called "compatible port") supports USB Sleep and Charge System ON CDP Charge USB Sleep and Charge You can use the Sleep and Charge function to charge certain USB-

compatible external devices such as mobile phones or portable digital music players. Your computer can supply USB bus power (DC5V) to the compatible port even when the computer is turned OFF. "Power OFF"

includes Sleep Mode, Hibernation Mode or shutdown state. To set USB Sleep and Charge feature, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -

> Tools & Utilities -> System Settings -> Sleep and Charge. Move the slider to enable or disable the Sleep and Charge function. The Sleep and Charge function may not work with certain external devices even if they are compliant with the USB specification. In those cases, turn the power of the computer ON to charge the device. When Sleep and Charge function is enabled, USB bus power (DC5V) will be supplied to compatible ports even when the power of the computer is turned OFF. USB bus power (DC5V) is similarly supplied to the external devices which are connected to the compatible ports. However, some external devices cannot be charged solely by supplying USB bus power (DC5V). As for the specifications of the external devices, please contact the device manufacturer or check the specifications of the external devices thoroughly before use. User's Manual 5-13 Using the sleep and charge function to charge external devices will take longer than charging the devices with their own chargers. If Sleep and Charge function is enabled, the computers battery will discharge during hibernation or when the computer is turned off. It is recommended that you connect the AC adaptor to the computer while using Sleep and Charge function. External devices connected to the USB bus power (DC5V) function that interfaces with the power ON/OFF of the computer may always be in an operational state. When there is a current overflow of the external devices connected to the compatible ports, USB bus power (DC5V) supply may be stopped for safety reasons. When Sleep and Charge function is enabled, the USB Wakeup function may not work for compatible ports. In that case, if there is a USB port that does not have the Sleep and Charge function, attach the mouse or keyboard to it. If all USB ports have the Sleep and Charge function, change to disable Sleep and Charge function. The USB Wakeup function will now work, but the Sleep and Charge function will be disabled. Metal paper clips or hair pins/clips will generate heat if they come into contact with USB ports. Do not allow USB ports to come into contact with metal products, for example when carrying the computer in your bag. Your PC has multiple charging modes so that many different USB devices can be supported for Sleep and Charge function. Auto Mode (Default) is suitable for a wide range of digital audio players. While using Auto Mode, your computer can supply USB bus power at maximum 2.0A to the compatible ports while the computer is turned off. When USB device cannot be charged by Auto Mode, change to Alternate Mode. This function may not be able to be used with some connected external devices even if the appropriate mode is selected. In this situation, disable and stop using this function. Some external devices cannot use Auto Mode. As for the specifications of the external devices, please contact the devices manufacture or check the specifications of the external device thoroughly before use. Always use the USB cable that was included with your USB device. Function under Battery Mode This option can be used to enable/disable sleep and charge under battery mode. It also displays the remaining battery capacity. Move the slider to enable or disable this function. User's Manual 5-14 Enabled Disabled Disable features when the battery level reaches Enables Sleep and Charge function under battery mode. Enables Sleep and Charge function only when the AC adaptor is connected. Specifies the lower limit of remaining battery life by moving the slider bar. If the remaining battery life falls below the setting, the Sleep and Charge function will be stopped. This setting is only available when the Function under Battery Mode is enabled. System ON CDP Charge This function enable/disable CDP (Charging Downstream Port) to use rapid USB charge while the computer is powered on. When "System ON CDP Charge Mode" is enabled, your computer can supply USB bus power

(DC5V, 1.5A) to the compatible ports while the computer is turned on. To set System ON CDP Charge Mode, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -

> Tools & Utilities -> System Settings -> USB. Enabled Rapid USB battery charge at maximum 1.5A while PC is powered On. Conventional USB battery charge while PC is powered On. Disabled The "System ON CDP Charge Mode" may not work with certain external devices even if they are compliant with the USB specifications. In those cases, use a USB port without "USB Sleep and Charge function" or disable System ON CDP Charge Mode. It is recommended that AC adaptor be connected to the computer while supplying USB bus power (DC5V, 1.5A). When your computer battery capacity is too low to continue, "System ON CDP Charge Mode" may not work. In those cases, connect the AC adaptor and reboot the computer. Always use the USB cable that was included with your USB device. When "System ON CDP Charge Mode" or USB Sleep and Charge function is enabled, the USB Wakeup function may not work. In that case, use a USB port without "USB Sleep and Charge function" or disable both System ON CDP Charge Mode and USB Sleep and Charge function. System Recovery There is a hidden partition allocated on the Solid State Drive for the System Recovery Options in the event of a problem. User's Manual 5-15 You can also create recovery media and restore the system. The following items will be described in this section:

Creating Recovery Media Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery Media Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery Solid State Drive Creating Recovery Media This section describes how to create Recovery Media. Be sure to connect the AC adaptor when you create Recovery Media. Be sure to close all other software programs except the Recovery Media Creator. Do not run software such as screen savers which can put a heavy load on the CPU. Operate the computer at full power. Do not use power-saving features. Do not write to the media when the virus check software is running. Wait for it to finish, then disable virus detection programs including any software that checks files automatically in the background. Do not use utilities, including those intended to enhance Solid State Drive access speed. They may cause unstable operation and damage data. Do not shut down/log off or Sleep/Hibernate while writing or rewriting the media. Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subjected to vibrations such as airplanes, trains, or cars. Do not use on an unstable surface such as a stand. A recovery image of the software on your computer is stored on the Solid State Drive, and can be copied to USB Flash Memory by using the following steps:

1. Select the USB Flash Memory. The application will allow you to choose from a variety of different media onto which the recovery image can be copied including USB Flash Memory. USB Flash Memory will be formatted and all the data in the USB Flash Memory will be lost when proceeding. 2. 3. Turn on your computer and allow it to load the Windows operating system from the Solid State Drive as normal. Insert the USB Flash Memory into one available USB port. User's Manual 5-16 4. Click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Support & Recovery ->

Recovery Media Creator. 5. After Recovery Media Creator starts, select the type of media and the title you wish to copy, and then click the Create button. Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery Media If the pre-installed files are damaged, you are able to use the Recovery Media you have created to restore the computer to the state it was in when you originally received it. To perform this restoration, follow the steps below:

When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard disk will be reformatted and all data will be lost. Please make sure to use the default Boot Mode option in the BIOS setup utility before restoring. 1. Launch the BIOS setup utility. Please refer to TOSHIBA Setup Utility section for further information. In the BIOS setup screen, select Advanced -> System Configuration

-> Boot Mode -> UEFI Boot (Default). If you set the Boot Mode as CSM Boot, the recovery media created by Recovery Media Creator will NOT be able to restore. If you create a recovery image using advanced recovery tools from Control Panel, please also make sure to use the default Boot Mode option (UEFI Boot) in the BIOS setup utility before restoring. Insert the recovery USB Flash Memory into one available USB port. In the Settings charm, click Power and then select Restart. 1. 2. 3. Hold down the F12 key and then release this key one second after the computer is power on. In tablet mode, hold down the Volume up button until the Boot menu is loaded. 4. Use the Volume up and the Volume down button to select the appropriate option from the menu according to your actual recovery media and press the Windows button to confirm the selection. 5. A menu will be displayed from which you should follow the on-screen instructions. If you have previously chosen to remove the recovery partition and are trying to create "Recovery Media", you will see the following message: "The Recovery Media Creator can not be launched because there is no recovery partition."

When there is no recovery partition, the Recovery Media Creator cannot make Recovery Media. User's Manual 5-17 However, if you have already created a "Recovery Media", you can use it to restore the recovery partition. If you have not created "Recovery Media", please contact TOSHIBA support for assistance. Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery Solid State Drive A portion of the total Solid State Drive space is configured as a hidden recovery partition. This partition stores files which can be used to restore pre-installed software in the event of a problem. If you subsequently set up your Solid State Drive again, do not change, delete or add partitions in a manner other than specified in the manual, otherwise you may find that space for the required software is not available. In addition, if you use a third-party partitioning program to reconfigure the partitions on your Solid State Drive, you may find that it becomes impossible to setup your computer. Make sure that the AC adaptor is connected during the restoring process. When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the Solid State Drive may be reformatted and all data may be lost. In the Settings charm, click Power and then select Restart. 1. 2. Hold down 0 (zero) key and then release this key one second after the computer is power on. In tablet mode, hold down the Volume up button until the Boot menu is loaded and then select HDD Recovery. Follow the on screen instructions to finish the recovery. 3. Select Troubleshoot. 4. Select Reset your PC. 5. You can also perform the restoration through PC settings in the operating system:

1. Click the Settings charm and click Change PC settings. 2. Click General under PC settings. 3. Scroll down to Remove everything and reinstall Windows and click Get started. Follow the on screen instructions to finish the recovery. 4. User's Manual 5-18 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting TOSHIBA has designed this computer for durability, however, should problems occur you are able to use the procedures detailed in this chapter to help determine the cause. All users should become familiar with this chapter as knowing what might go wrong can help prevent problems from occurring in the first place. Problem solving process Resolving problems will be much easier if you observe the following guidelines:

Stop immediately when you recognize a problem exists as taking further action may result in data loss or damage, or you may destroy valuable problem related information that can help solve the problem. Observe what is happening - write down what the system is doing and what actions you performed immediately before the problem occurred. Make a screenshot of the current display. Please also be aware that the questions and procedures described in this chapter are meant only as a guide, they are not definitive problem solving techniques. In reality many problems can be solved simply, but a few may require help from TOSHIBA Support - if you find you need to consult others, be prepared to describe the problem in as much detail as possible. Preliminary checklist You should always consider the simplest solution first - the items detailed in this checklist are easy to fix and yet can cause what appears to be a serious problem:

Make sure you turn on all peripheral devices before you turn on the computer - this includes your printer and any other external device you are using. Before you attach an external device you should first turn the computer off, then when you turn the computer back on again it will recognize the new device. Make sure all optional accessories are configured properly in the computer's setup program and that all required driver software has been loaded (please refer to the documentation included with the optional accessories for further information on its installation and configuration). User's Manual 6-1 Check all cables to ensure they are correctly and firmly attached to the computer - loose cables can cause signal errors. Inspect all connecting cables for loose wires and all connectors for loose pins. Always try to make detailed notes of your observations and keep them in a permanent error log - this will help you to describe your problems to TOSHIBA Support. In addition, if a problem recurs, the log you have made will help to identify the problem faster. Analyzing the problem Sometimes the computer will give you clues that can help you identify why it is malfunctioning. In view of this you should keep the following questions in mind:

Which part of the computer is not operating properly - keyboard, Solid State Drive, display panel, Touch Pad, Touch Pad control buttons - as each device will produce different symptoms. Check the options within the operating system to ensure that its configuration is set properly. What appears on the display? Does it display any messages or random characters? Make a screenshot of the current display and, if possible, look up the messages in the documentation included with the computer, software or operating system. Check that all connecting cables are correctly and firmly attached as loose cables can cause erroneous or intermittent signals. Do any indicators light, if so, which ones, what color are they and do they stay on or blink? Write down what you see. Do you hear any beeps, if so how many, are they long or short and are they high pitched or low pitched? In addition, is the computer making any unusual noises? Write down what you hear. Record your observations so you can describe them in detail to TOSHIBA Support. Software The problems may be caused by your software or disk. If you cannot load a software package, the media may be damaged or the program might be corrupted - in these instances try loading another copy of the software if possible. If an error message appears while you are using a software package you should refer to the documentation supplied with it as this will usually include a problem solving section or a summary of error messages. Next, you should check any error messages against the operating system documentation. User's Manual 6-2 Hardware If you cannot find a software problem, you should then check the setup and configuration of your hardware. First run through the items in the preliminary checklist as described previously then, if you still cannot correct the problem, try to identify the source - the next section provides checklists for individual components and peripherals. Before using a peripheral device or application software that is not an authorized TOSHIBA part or product, make sure the device or software can be used with your computer. Use of incompatible devices may cause injury or may damage your computer. If something goes wrong Your computer does not respond to the keyboard commands If an error occurs and the computer does not respond to your keyboard commands, follow the steps below:

Press the power button and hold it down for five seconds. Once the computer has turned itself off, wait between ten and fifteen seconds before turning the power on again by pressing the power button. Your program stops responding If you are working with a program that suddenly freezes all operations, chances are the program has stopped responding. You can exit the failed program without shutting down the operating system or closing other programs. To close a program that has stopped responding:

1. Press CTRL, ALT, and DEL simultaneously (once), then click Task Manager. The Windows Task Manager window appears. 2. Select the program you want to close, then click End Task. Closing the failed program should allow you to continue working. If it does not, continue with the next step. 3. Close the remaining programs one by one by selecting the program name, then End Task. Closing all programs should allow you to continue working. If it does not, power off your computer and then restart it. The computer will not start Make sure you attached the AC adaptor and power cord/cable properly. If you are using the AC adaptor, check that the wall outlet is working by plugging in another device, such as a lamp. Verify that the computer is on by looking at the Power indicator. User's Manual 6-3 If the indicator is glowing, the computer is on. Also, try turning the computer off and then on. If you are using an AC adaptor, verify that the computer is receiving power from the external power source by looking at the DC IN/Battery indicator. If the indicator is glowing, the computer is connected to a live external power source. The computer will not load advanced options during startup The advanced option will be loaded when you hold down one of the following keys on the keyboard dock during startup. The equivalent button operation in tablet mode are also described. Advanced option BIOS utility Key & button operations Boot menu Recovery options F2 while holding down Volume down button, press Power button F12 while holding down Volume up button, press Power button 0 (zero)

-

If your computer starts to load the Operating System instead of desired advanced options, follow the steps below:

1. 2. Hold down the corresponding key and then release this key one In the Settings charm, click Power and then select Restart. second after the computer is power on. In tablet mode, hold down the corresponding button (no need to press Power button) until the advanced option is loaded. Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed. 3. Hardware and system checklist This section discusses problems caused by your computers hardware or attached peripherals. Basic problems may occur in the following areas:

Power Keyboard Internal display panel Solid State Drive Memory Media Card Pointing Device USB device Sound system External monitor Wireless LAN Bluetooth User's Manual 6-4 Power When the computer is not plugged into an AC power outlet, the battery pack is the primary power source. However, your computer also has a number of other power resources, including an intelligent power supply and a Real Time Clock (RTC) battery, all of which are interrelated with any one having the ability to produce apparent power problems. Overheating power down If the processor's temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with either setting, the computer will automatically shut down to prevent any damage - in this instance all unsaved data in memory will be lost. Problem Computer shuts down automatically Procedure Leave the computer off until the it reaches room temperature. If the computer has reached room temperature and it still does not start, or if it starts but shuts down quickly, contact TOSHIBA Support. AC power If you have trouble turning on the computer with the AC adaptor connected you should check the status of the DC IN/Battery indicator. Please refer to the Power Condition Descriptions section for further information. Problem AC adaptor doesnt power the computer Procedure Check the connections to make sure that the power cord/adaptor is firmly connected to the computer and a working power outlet. Check the condition of the cord and terminals. If the cord is frayed or damaged it should be replaced, while if the terminals are soiled, they should be cleaned with a clean cotton cloth. If the AC adaptor still does not power the computer, you should contact TOSHIBA Support. Battery If you suspect a problem with the battery, you should check the status of the Battery indicator. Problem Battery doesnt power the computer Procedure The battery may be discharged - connect the AC adaptor to recharge the battery. User's Manual 6-5 Problem Battery doesnt charge when the AC adaptor is attached Battery doesnt power the computer as long as expected Procedure If the battery is completely discharged, it will not begin charging immediately, in these instances you should wait a few minutes before trying again. If the battery still does not charge, you should check that the power outlet the AC adaptor is connected to is supplying power - this can be tested by plugging another appliance into it. If you frequently recharge a partially charged battery, the battery might not charge to its full potential - in these instances you should fully discharge the battery and then attempt to charge it again. Check the Power saver option under Select a power plan in the Power Options. Real Time Clock Problem The BIOS setting and system date/

time are lost Procedure The charge in the Real Time Clock (RTC) battery has run out - you will need to set the date and time in the BIOS setup utility by using the following steps:

1. Launch the BIOS setup utility. Please refer to TOSHIBA Setup Utility section for further information. 2. Set the date in the System Date field. 3. Set the time in the System Time field. 4. Select Exit -> Exit Saving Changes - a confirmation message will be displayed. 5. Select Yes - the BIOS setup utility will end and the computer will restart. Keyboard Keyboard problems can be caused by the setup and configuration of the computer - please refer to the The Keyboard section for further information. User's Manual 6-6 Problem Output to screen is garbled Procedure Please refer to your software's documentation to ensure that it is not remapping the keyboard in any way (remapping involves changing or reassigning the function of each key). If you are still unable to use the keyboard, you should contact TOSHIBA Support. Internal display panel Apparent computer's display panel problems may be related to the computer's setup and configuration - please refer to the TOSHIBA System Settings section, for further information. Problem No display Markings appear on the computer's display panel Solid State Drive Problem Slow performance Procedure Press the function keys to adjust the display priority, and to make sure it is not set for output to an external monitor. These marks may have come from contact with the keyboard and Touch Pad while the display panel has been closed. You should try to remove the marks by gently wiping the display panel with a clean dry cloth or, if this fails, with a good quality LCD screen cleaner. In this latter instance you should always follow the instructions with the screen cleaner and always ensure you let the display panel dry properly before closing it. Procedure The files on the Solid State Drive may be fragmented - in this instance you should run the disk Defragmentation utility to check the condition of your files and the Solid State Drive. Please refer to the operating system's documentation or online Help File for further information on operating and using the Defragmentation utility. As a last resort you should reformat the Solid State Drive and then reload the operating system and all other files and data. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact TOSHIBA Support. User's Manual 6-7 Memory Media Card For further information, please refer to Operating Basics. Problem Memory media card error occurs Procedure Remove the memory media card from the computer and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly connected. If the problem persists, then you should refer to the documentation supplied with your memory media card for further information. Remove the memory media card from the computer and check to ensure that it is not write protected. Check to ensure the required file is actually on the memory media card that is inserted into the computer. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact TOSHIBA Support. You cannot write to a memory media card You cannot read a file Pointing device If you are using a USB mouse, you should also refer to both the USB mouse section and the documentation supplied with your mouse. Touch Pad Problem The Touch Pad does not work On-screen pointer does not respond to pointing device operation Procedure Check the Device Select settings. Click Desktop -> Desktop Assist -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse. In this instance the system might be busy - Try moving the mouse again after waiting a short while. User's Manual 6-8 Problem Double-tapping

(Touch Pad) does not work The on-screen pointer moves too fast or too slow Procedure In this instance, you should initially try changing the double-click speed setting within the Mouse Control utility. 1. To access this utility, click Desktop ->

Desktop Assist -> Control Panel ->

Hardware and Sound -> Mouse. 2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the 3. Set the double-click speed as required and Buttons tab. click OK. In this instance, you should initially try changing the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility. 1. To access this utility, click Desktop ->

Desktop Assist -> Control Panel ->

Hardware and Sound -> Mouse. 2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the Pointer Options tab. 3. Set the pointer speed as required and click OK. The reaction of Touch pad is either too sensitive or not sensitive enough Adjust the touch Sensitivity. To access it, click Desktop -> Desktop Assist ->

Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound ->

Mouse. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact TOSHIBA Support. USB mouse Problem On-screen pointer does not respond to mouse operation Procedure In this instance the system might be busy - Try moving the mouse again after waiting a short while. Remove the mouse from the computer and then reconnect it to a free USB port in order to ensure it is firmly attached. User's Manual 6-9 Problem Double-clicking does not work The on-screen pointer moves too fast or too slow Procedure In this instance, you should initially try changing the double-click speed setting within the Mouse Control utility. 1. To access this utility, click Desktop ->

Desktop Assist -> Control Panel ->

Hardware and Sound -> Mouse. 2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the 3. Set the double-click speed as required and Buttons tab. click OK. In this instance, you should initially try changing the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility. 1. To access this utility, click Desktop ->

Desktop Assist -> Control Panel ->

Hardware and Sound -> Mouse. 2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the Pointer Options tab. 3. Set the pointer speed as required and click OK. The on-screen pointer moves erratically The elements of the mouse responsible for detecting movement might be dirty - please refer to the documentation supplied with the mouse for instructions on how to clean it. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact TOSHIBA Support. USB device In addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the documentation supplied with your USB device. Problem USB device does not work Procedure Remove the USB device from the computer and then reconnect it to a free port in order to ensure it is firmly attached. Ensure that any required USB device drivers are properly installed - to achieve this you should refer to both the device documentation and the operating system documentation. User's Manual 6-10 Sound system In addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the documentation supplied with your audio device. Problem No sound is heard Procedure Press the function keys to increase or decrease volume. Check the software volume settings. Please check to see if Mute is turned to Off Check to make sure the headphone connection is secure. Check within the Windows Device Manager application to ensure the sound device is enabled and that the device is properly working. In this instance you may be experiencing feedback from either the internal microphone or an external microphone connected to the computer - please refer to Sound System and Video mode for further information. Volume cannot be adjusted during Windows start up or shut down. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact TOSHIBA Support. Annoying sound is heard External monitor Please also refer to Operating Basics, and to the documentation supplied with your monitor for further information. Problem Monitor does not turn on Procedure After confirming that the monitor's power switch is on, you should check the connections to make sure that the power cord/adaptor is firmly connected to the monitor and to a working power outlet. User's Manual 6-11 Problem No display Procedure Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls on the external monitor. Press the function key in order to change the display priority and ensure that it is not set for the internal display only. Check to see if the external monitor is connected. When the external monitor is set as the primary display device in extended desktop mode, it will not display when the computer wakes up from Sleep Mode if the external monitor has been disconnected while in Sleep Mode. To keep this from happening, do not disconnect the external monitor while the computer is in Sleep or Hibernation Mode. Remember to turn off the computer before disconnecting the external monitor. When the display panel and an external monitor are set to clone mode and they are turned off by the timer, the display panel or the external monitor may not display when turned on again. If this occurs, press the function key to re-set the display panel and external monitor to clone mode. Display error occurs Check that the cable connecting the external monitor to the computer is firmly attached. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact TOSHIBA Support. Wireless LAN Problem Cannot access Wireless LAN Procedure Make sure the computer's Wireless communication function is on. If problems persist, contact your LAN administrator. User's Manual 6-12 Bluetooth Problem Cannot access Bluetooth device Procedure Check to ensure the computer's Wireless Communication function is on. Check to ensure the Bluetooth Manager application is running on the computer and that power to the external Bluetooth device is turned on. Check to ensure that no optional Bluetooth Adaptor is installed in the computer - the built-in Bluetooth hardware cannot operate simultaneously with another Bluetooth controller. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact TOSHIBA Support. TOSHIBA support If you require any additional help using your computer or if you are having problems operating the computer, you may need to contact TOSHIBA for additional technical assistance. Before you call Some problems you experience may be related to software or the operating system so it is important that you investigate other sources of assistance first. Before contacting TOSHIBA, try the following:

Review troubleshooting sections in the documentation supplied with your software and/or peripheral devices. If a problem occurs when you are running software applications, consult the software documentation for troubleshooting suggestions and consider calling the software company's technical support department for assistance. Consult the reseller or dealer from where you purchased your computer and/or software - they are your best resource for current information and support. TOSHIBA technical support If you are still unable to solve the problem and suspect that it is hardware related, visit TOSHIBA technical support website http://www.toshiba.co.jp/

worldwide/. User's Manual 6-13 Chapter 7 Appendix Specifications This section summarizes the computers technical specifications. Physical Dimensions Physical Dimensions shown below do not include parts that extend beyond the main body. The physical dimensions may vary depending on the model you purchased. Size 331.2 (w) x 215 (d) x 13.9(h) millimeters (Tablet only) 331.2 (w) x 215 (d) x 24.7(h) millimeters (laptop mode)

(not including parts that extend beyond the main body). Environmental Requirements Conditions Operating Non-operating Ambient temperature Relative humidity 5C (41F) to 35C

(95F)

-20C (-4F) to 60C

(140F) 20% to 80%

(noncondensing) 10% to 90%

(noncondensing) Wet-bulb temperature 29C maximum Conditions Operating Non-operating Altitude (from sea level)

-60 to 3,000 meters

-60 to 10,000 meters maximum Power Requirements AC adaptor Computer 100-240V AC 50 or 60 Hz (cycles per second) 19V DC User's Manual 7-1 AC Power Cord and Connectors The power cords AC input plug must be compatible with the various international AC power outlets and the cord must meet the standards for the country/region in which it is used. All cords must meet the following specifications:

Wire size:

Current rating:

Minimum 0.75 mm2 Minimum 2.5 amperes Certification agencies China:

U.S. and Canada:

Australia:

Japan:

Europe:

Austria:

Belgium:

Denmark:

Finland:

France:

Germany:

CQC UL listed and CSA certified No. 18 AWG, Type SVT or SPT-2 AS DENANHO OVE CEBEC DEMKO FIMKO LCIE VDE Italy:

The Netherlands:

Norway:

Sweden:

Switzerland:

United Kingdom:

IMQ KEMA NEMKO SEMKO SEV BSI In Europe, two conductors power cord must be VDE type, H05VVH2-F or H03VVH2-F and for three conductors power cord must be VDE type, H05VV-F. For the United States and Canada, two pin plug configuration must be a 2-15P (250V) or 1-15P (125V) and three pin plug configuration must be 6-15P (250V) or 5-15P (125V) as designated in the U.S. National Electrical code handbook and the Canadian Electrical Code Part II. The following illustrations show the plug shapes for the U.S.A. and Canada, the United Kingdom, Australia, Europe and China. User's Manual 7-2 USA United Kingdom UL approved Australia AS approved Canada BS approved Europe Approved by the appropriate agency China CSA approved CCC approved Information for Wireless Devices Wireless Technology Interoperability The Wireless LAN is compatible with other LAN systems Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) /Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) radio technology, and is compliant to:

The IEEE 802.11 Standard on Wireless LANs (Revision a/b/g/n, b/g/n or Revision a/b/g/n/ac), as defined and approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. Bluetooth Modules are designed to be interoperable with any product with Bluetooth wireless technology that is based on Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) radio technology, and is compliant to:

Bluetooth Specification (depending on the model you purchased), as defined and approved by the Bluetooth Special Interest Group. Logo certification with Bluetooth wireless technology as defined by the Bluetooth Special interest Group. This Bluetooth product is not compatible with devices using Bluetooth Version 1.0B specifications. The wireless devices have not completed verification of connection and operation with all devices which are using the Wireless LAN or Bluetooth radio technology. Bluetooth and Wireless LAN devices operate within the same radio frequency range and may interfere with one another. If you use Bluetooth User's Manual 7-3 and Wireless LAN devices simultaneously, you may occasionally experience a less than optimal network performance or even lose your network connection. If you should experience any such problem, immediately turn off either one of your Bluetooth or Wireless LAN. Please visit http://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com, if you have any questions about using Wireless LAN or Bluetooth Module. In Europe visit http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm Wireless Devices and your health Wireless products, like other radio devices, emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by Wireless products however is far much less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for example mobile phones. Because Wireless products operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, TOSHIBA believes Wireless products is safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of Wireless products may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization. These situations may for example include:

Using the Wireless products equipment on board of airplanes, or In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (e.g. airports), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the Wireless device prior to turning on the equipment. Wireless LAN Technology The computers wireless communication function supports some wireless communication devices. Only some models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions. Do not use the Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) or Bluetooth functionalities near a microwave oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic fields. Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt Wi-Fi or Bluetooth operation. User's Manual 7-4 Turn all wireless functionalities off when near a person who may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric device. Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction for your medical device when using any wireless functionality. Always turn off wireless functionality if the computer is near automatic control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment, possibly resulting in serious injury. It may not be possible to make a network connection to a specified network name using the ad hoc network function. If this occurs, the new network (*) will have to be configured for all computers connected to the same network in order to re-enable network connections.

* Please be sure to use new network name. Security TOSHIBA strongly recommend that you enable encryption functionality, otherwise your computer will be open to illegal access by an outsider using a wireless connection. If this occurs, the outsider may illegally access your system, eavesdrop, or cause the loss or destruction of stored data. TOSHIBA is not liable for the loss of data due to eavesdropping or illegal access through the wireless LAN and the damage thereof. Card Specifications Form Factor Compatibility Network Operating System Media Access Protocol PCI Express Mini Card IEEE 802.11 Standard for Wireless LANs Microsoft Windows Networking CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with Acknowledgment (ACK) Radio Characteristics Radio Characteristics of Wireless LAN module may vary according to:

Country/region where the product was purchased Type of product Wireless communication is often subject to local radio regulations. Although Wireless LAN wireless networking products have been designed for operation in the license-free 2.4GHz and 5GHz band, local radio regulations may impose a number of limitations to the use of wireless communication equipment. User's Manual 7-5 Radio Frequency Band 5GHz (5150-5850 MHz) (Revision a and n) Band 2.4GHz (2400-2483.5 MHz) (Revision b/g and n) The range of the wireless signal is related to the transmit rate of the wireless communication. Communications at lower transmit range may travel larger distances. The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas are placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density materials. Range is also impacted due to "obstacles" in the signal path of the radio that may either absorb or reflect the radio signal. Radio Frequency Interference Requirements This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25GHz frequency range. High-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5.25 to 5.35GHz and 5.65 to 5.85GHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Bluetooth wireless technology Some computers in this series have Bluetooth wireless communication function which eliminates the need for cables between electronic devices such as computers, printers and mobile phones. When it is enabled, Bluetooth provides the wireless personal area network environment which is safe and trustworthy, that is quick and easy. You cannot use the computer's built-in Bluetooth functions and an external Bluetooth adaptor simultaneously. For reference, Bluetooth wireless technology has the following features:

Security Two advanced security mechanisms ensure a high level of security:

Authentication prevents access to critical data and makes it impossible to falsify the origin of a message. Encryption prevents eavesdropping and maintains link privacy. Worldwide operation The Bluetooth radio transmitter and receiver operate in the 2.4GHz band, which is license-free and compatible with radio systems in most countries in the world. User's Manual 7-6 Radio links You can easily establish links between two or more devices, with these links being maintained even if the devices are not within a line-of-sight of each other. Radio Regulatory Information The Wireless device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. This product complies with the following radio frequency and safety standards. Europe Restrictions for Use of 2400.0-2483.5MHz Frequencies in Europe France:

Italy:

Outdoor use limited to 10mW e.i.r.p. within the band 2454-2483.5MHz

-

Luxembourg:

Implemented Norway:

Implemented Russian Federation:

-

Military Radiolocation use. Refarming of the 2.4GHz band has been ongoing in recent years to allow current relaxed regulation Full implementation planned 2012. For private use, a general authorization is required if WAS/

RLANs are used outside own premises. For public use, a general authorization is required. General authorization required for network and service supply. This subsection does not apply for the geographical area within a radius of 20 km from the centre of Ny-Alesund. Only for indoor applications. Restrictions for Use of 5150-5350MHz Frequencies in Europe Italy:

-

Luxembourg:

Implemented For private use, a general authorization is required if WAS/

RLANs are used outside own premises. General authorization required for network and service supply. User's Manual 7-7 Russian Federation:

Limited e.i.r.p 100mW. Permitted to use only for indoor applications, closed industrial and warehouse areas, and on board aircraft. 1. Permitted to use for local networks of aircraft crew service communications on board aircraft in area of the airport and at all stages of flight. 2. Permitted to use for public wireless access local networks on board aircraft during a flight at the altitude not less than 3000m. Restrictions for Use of 5470-5725MHz Frequencies in Europe Italy:

-

Luxembourg:

Implemented Russian Federation:

Limited For private use, a general authorization is required if WAS/

RLANs are used outside own premises. General authorization required for network and service supply e.i.r.p 100mW. Permitted to use only for indoor applications, closed industrial and warehouse areas, and on board aircraft. 1. Permitted to use for local networks of aircraft crew service communications on board aircraft in area of the airport and at all stages of flight. 2. Permitted to use for public wireless access local networks on board aircraft during a flight at the altitude not less than 3000m. To remain in conformance with European spectrum usage laws for Wireless LAN operation, the above 2.4GHz and 5GHz channel limitations apply for outdoor usage. The user should use the wireless LAN utility to User's Manual 7-8 check the current channel of operation. If operation is occurring outside of the allowable frequencies for outdoor use, as listed above, the user must contact the applicable national spectrum regulator to request a license for outdoor operation. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR-210 d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. Les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5.15-5.25GHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation l'intrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux. Les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., qu'ils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5.25-5.35GHz et 5.65-5.85GHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-

EL. The term IC before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. Refer to the FCC information section for the detailed information. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The radiated output power of the Wireless device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Wireless device shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health User's Manual 7-9 Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas website www.hc-sc.gc.ca Taiwan Article 12 Article 14 Without permission granted by the NCC, any company, enterprise, or user is not allowed to change frequency, enhance transmitting power or alter original characteristic as well as performance to an approved low power radio frequency devices. The low power radio-frequency devices shall not influence aircraft security and interfere legal communications;

If found, the user shall cease operating immediately until no interference is achieved. The said legal communications means radio communications is operated in compliance with the Telecommunications Act. The low power radio-frequency devices must be susceptible with the interference from legal communications or ISM radio wave radiated devices. Australia and New Zealand regulatory compliance This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting device, in normal use a separation distance of 20cm will ensure radio frequency exposure levels complies with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Using this equipment in Japan In Japan, the frequency bandwidth of 2,400MHz to 2,483.5MHz for second generation low-power data communication systems such as this equipment overlaps that of mobile object identification systems (premises radio station and specified low-power radio station). 1. Important notice The frequency bandwidth of this equipment may operate within the same range as industrial devices, scientific devices, medical devices, microwave ovens, licensed radio stations and non-licensed specified low-power radio stations for mobile object identification systems (RFID) used in factory production lines (Other Radio Stations). 1. Before using this equipment, ensure that it does not interfere with any of the equipment listed above. User's Manual 7-10 2. If this equipment causes RF interference to other radio stations, promptly change the frequency being used, change the location of use, or turn off the source of emissions. 3. Contact an authorized TOSHIBA service provider if you have problems with interference caused by this product to Other Radio Stations. 2. Indication for Wireless LAN The indication shown below appears on this equipment. 2.4 : This equipment uses a frequency of 2.4GHz. 1. 2. DS : This equipment uses DS-SS modulation. 3. OF : This equipment uses OFDM modulation. 4. 5. 4 : The interference range of this equipment is less than 40m.

: This equipment uses a frequency bandwidth from 2,400MHz to 2,483.5MHz. It is possible to avoid the band of mobile object identification systems. 3. Indication for Bluetooth The indication shown below appears on this equipment. 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.4 : This equipment uses a frequency of 2.4 GHz. FH : This equipment uses FH-SS modulation. 1 : The interference range of this equipment is less than 10m.

: This equipment uses a frequency bandwidth from 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz. It is impossible to avoid the band of mobile object identification systems. 4. About the JEITA 5GHz Wireless LAN supports W52/W53/W56 Channel. User's Manual 7-11

(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(4)(1)(2)(3)1 Radio approvals for wireless devices This equipment is approved to the radio standard by the countries/regions in the following table. If you use this equipment in the countries/regions which are not listed in the table blow, please contact TOSHIBA Support. As of July 2013 Austria Cyprus Finland Hong Kong Indonesia Korea Luxemburg Norway Romania Sweden Belgium Czech Rep France Hungary Ireland Latvia Malta Philippines Slovak Republic Switzerland Bulgaria Denmark Germany Iceland Italy Liechtenstein Monaco Poland Slovenia UK Canada Estonia Greece India Japan Lithuania Netherlands Portugal Spain USA Legal Footnotes Non-applicable Icons Certain computer chassis are designed to accommodate all possible configurations for an entire product series. Therefore, please be aware that your selected model may not have all the features and specifications corresponding to all of the icons or switches shown on the computer chassis. CPU Central Processing Unit (CPU) Performance Legal Footnotes. CPU performance in your computer product may vary from specifications under the following conditions:

use of certain external peripheral products use of battery power instead of AC power use of certain multimedia, computer generated graphics or video applications use of standard telephone lines or low speed network connections use of complex modeling software, such as high end computer aided design applications User's Manual 7-12 use of several applications or functionalities simultaneously use of computer in areas with low air pressure (high altitude >1,000 meters or >3,280 feet above sea level) use of computer at temperatures outside the range of 5C to 30C

(41F to 86F) or >25C (77F) at high altitude (all temperature references are approximate and may vary depending on the specific computer model - please refer to your computer documentation or visit the TOSHIBA website at www.pcsupport.toshiba.com for details). CPU performance may also vary from specifications due to design configuration. Under some conditions, your computer product may automatically shut-

down. This is a normal protective feature designed to reduce the risk of lost data or damage to the product when used outside recommended conditions. To avoid risk of lost data, always make back-up copies of data by periodically storing it on an external storage medium. For optimum performance, use your computer product only under recommended conditions. Read additional restrictions in your product documentation. Contact TOSHIBA technical service and support, refer to TOSHIBA support section for more information. 64-Bit Computing Certain 32-bit device drivers and/or applications may not be compatible with a 64-bit CPU/operating system and therefore may not function properly. Memory (Main System) Part of the main system memory may be used by the graphics system for graphics performance and therefore reduce the amount of main system memory available for other computing activities. The amount of main system memory allocated to support graphics may vary depending on the graphics system, applications utilized, system memory size and other factors. Battery Life Battery life may vary considerably depending on product model, configuration, applications, power management settings and features utilized, as well as the natural performance variations produced by the design of individual components. Published battery life numbers are achieved on select models and configurations tested by TOSHIBA at the time of publication. Recharge time varies depending on usage. Battery may not charge while computer is consuming full power. After going through many charge and discharge cycles, the battery will lose its ability to perform at maximum capacity and will need to be replaced. This is a normal phenomenon for all batteries. To purchase a new battery pack, see the accessories information that is shipped with your computer. User's Manual 7-13 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity 1 Gigabyte (GB) means 109 = 1,000,000,000 bytes using powers of 10. The computer operating system, however, reports storage capacity using powers of 2 for the definition of 1 GB = 230 = 1,073,741,824 bytes, and therefore shows less storage capacity. Available storage capacity will also be less if the product includes one or more pre-installed operating systems, such as Microsoft Operating System and/or pre-installed software applications, or media content. Actual formatted capacity may vary. LCD Over a period of time, and depending on the usage of the computer, the brightness of the LCD screen will deteriorate. This is an intrinsic characteristic of LCD technology. Maximum brightness is only available when operating in AC power mode. Screen will dim when the computer is operated on battery power and you may not be able to increase the brightness of the screen. Graphics Processing Unit (GPU) Graphics processing unit (GPU) performance may vary depending on product model, design configuration, applications, power management settings and features utilized. GPU performance is only optimized when operating in AC power mode and may decrease considerably when operating in battery power mode. Total Available Graphics Memory is the total of, as applicable, Dedicated Video Memory, System Video Memory and Shared System Memory. Shared System Memory will vary depending on system memory size and other factors. Wireless LAN The transmission speed over the wireless LAN and the distance over which wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and configuration, and client design and software/hardware configurations. The actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum speed. Copy Protection Applicable copy protection standards included in certain media may prevent or limit recording or viewing of the media. Glossary The terms in this glossary cover topics related to this manual. Alternate naming is included for reference. User's Manual 7-14 Abbreviations AC:

AMT:

ASCII:

BIOS:

BD-ROM:

bps:

CD:

CD-ROM:

CD-RW:

CMOS:

CPU:

DC:

DDR:

DIMM:

DVD:

DVD-R:

DVD-RAM:

DVD-R DL:

DVD-ROM:

DVD-RW:

DVD+R DL:

FAT:

FCC:

FHD:

GB:

GBps:

HD:

HD+:

HDD:

HDMI:

HDMI CEC:

HTML:

Alternating Current Intel Active Management Technology American Standard Code for Information Interchange Basic Input/output System Blu-ray Disc Read-only Memory bits per second Compact Disc Compact Disc Read-only Memory Compact Disc-rewritable Complementary Metal-oxide Semiconductor Central Processing Unit Direct Current Double Data Rate Dual Inline Memory Module Digital Versatile Disc Digital Versatile Disc-recordable Digital Versatile Disc-random Access Memory Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Dual Layer Digital Versatile Disc-read Only Memory Digital Versatile Disc-rewritable Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Double Layer File Allocation Table Federal Communications Commission Full High Definition gigabyte gigabytes per second High Definition High Definition Plus Hard Disk Drive High-definition Multimedia Interface High-definition Multimedia Interface Consumer Electronics Control Hypertext Markup Language User's Manual 7-15 IEEE:

I/O:

IRQ:

ISP:

KB:

LAN:

LCD:

LED:

MB:

MBps:

MMC:

OCR:

PC:

PCI:

PCMCIA:

RAM:

RGB:

RFI:

ROM:

RTC:

S/P DIF:

SD:

SDHC:

SDXC:

SDRAM:

SSD:

TFT:

URL:

USB:

WAN:

WQHD:

www:

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Input/Output interrupt request Internet Service Provider kilobyte Local Area Network Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode megabyte megabytes per second Multi Media Card Optical Character Recognition (Reader) Personal Computer Peripheral Component Interconnect Personal Computer Memory Card International Association Random Access Memory Red, Green, and Blue Radio Frequency Interference Read Only Memory Real Time Clock Sony/philips Digital Interface Format Secure Digital Secure Digital High Capacity Secure Digital Extended Capacity Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory Solid State Drive Thin-film Transistor Uniform Resource Locator Universal Serial Bus Wide Area Network Wide Quad High Definition World Wide Web User's Manual 7-16 Index A AC adaptor additional 4-16 connecting 2-6 DC IN 19V jack 3-2 B Battery extending life 4-11 monitoring capacity 4-9 real time clock 3-9, 4-7 save mode 5-5 types 4-7 Battery indicator Bluetooth 7-6 Cleaning the computer 1-12 Cooling vents 3-2, 3-8 C D DC IN indicator 3-1 DC IN/Battery indicator 3-11 Display automatic power off 5-5 opening 2-4 screen 3-7 Documentation list 2-1 Dual Pointing Device Touch Pad 6-8 E Equipment checklist 2-1 External monitor problems 6-11 H Hard disk drive automatic power off 5-5 HW Setup accessing window K Keyboard function keys 4-5 Function keys F1...F12 4-5 problems 6-6 Windows special keys 4-6 M Media care Card care 4-12 memory media card inserting 4-13 removing 4-14 Display controller 3-10 User's Manual Index-1 P Memory media slot 4-11 Moving the computer 1-13 MultiMediaCard removing 4-14 R TOSHIBA support 6-13 Touch Pad 6-8 USB device 6-10 USB mouse 6-9 Recovery hard disk drive 5-18 Recovery Media 5-17 Restarting the computer 2-12 S Sleep Mode setting 2-12 System automatic 5-5 Sound system problems 6-11 T TOSHIBA Desktop Assist 5-1 TOSHIBA Display Utility 5-2 Touch Screen U USB device problems 6-10 V Video mode 4-18 Video RAM 3-9 Password power on 5-5 Starting the computer by password 5-8 Supervisor 5-8 user 5-6 Pointing Device Touch Pad 3-7 Power conditions 3-10 Hibernation Mode 2-13 panel on/off 5-5 Shut Down mode 2-11 Sleep Mode 2-12 turning off 2-11 turning on 2-8 Problems AC power 6-5 Analyzing the problem 6-2 Battery 6-5 Dual Pointing device 6-8 External monitor 6-11 Hardware and system checklist 6-4 HDD 6-7 Internal display panel 6-7 Keyboard 6-6 Memory Media Card 6-8 Overheating power down 6-5 Power 6-5 Real Time Clock 6-6 Sound system 6-11 User's Manual Index-2 W Web Camera 3-6 Wireless communication 7-4 User's Manual Index-3

Inspiron 20 Quick Start Guide Translated Text Here Translated Text Here Translated Text Here Translated Text Here Dell - Internal Use - Confidential 1 Lift the stand Lift the stand | Lift the stand Lift the stand | Lift the stand 3 Connect the power adapter Connect the power adapter | Connect the power adapter Connect the power adapter | Connect the power adapter 5 Finish Windows setup Finish Windows setup | Finish Windows setup Finish Windows setup | Finish Windows setup Explore resources Explore resources Explore resources | Explore resources Explore resources | Explore resources Explore resources | Explore resources Explore resources | Explore resources 4 Press the power button Press the power button | Press the power button Press the power button | Press the power button 2 Set up the keyboard and mouse Set up the keyboard and mouse Set up the keyboard and mouse Set up the keyboard and mouse Set up the keyboard and mouse See the documentation that shipped with the keyboard andmouse. See the documentation that shipped with the keyboard andmouse. See the documentation that shipped with the keyboard andmouse. See the documentation that shipped with the keyboard andmouse. See the documentation that shipped with the keyboard andmouse. Help and Tips Help and Tips | Help and Tips Help and Tips | Help and Tips My Dell My Dell | My Dell My Dell | My Dell Register your computer Register your computer | Register your computer Register your computer | Register your computer Enable security and updates Enable security and updates Enable security and updates Enable security and updates Enable security and updates Connect to your network Connect to your network Connect to your network Connect to your network Connect to your network Sign in to your Microsoft account orcreate alocal account Sign in to your Microsoft account orcreate alocal account Sign in to your Microsoft account orcreate alocal account Sign in to your Microsoft account orcreate alocal account Sign in to your Microsoft account orcreate alocal account Tilt Tilt | Tilt Tilt | Tilt 33 168 Features Features | Features | Features | Features 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 Product support and manuals Product support and manuals Product support and manuals Product support and manuals Product support and manuals Contact Dell Contact Dell | Contact Dell Contact Dell | Contact Dell Regulatory and safety Regulatory and safety | Regulatory and safety Regulatory and safety | Regulatory and safety Regulatory model Regulatory model | Regulatory model Regulatory model | Regulatory model Regulatory type Regulatory type | Regulatory type Regulatory type | Regulatory type Computer model Computer model | Computer model Computer model | Computer model dell.com/support dell.com/support/manuals dell.com/windows8 dell.com/contactdell dell.com/regulatory_compliance W13B W13B001 Inspiron 20 Model 3043 Informacin para NOM, o Norma Oficial Mexicana La informacin que se proporciona a continuacin se mostrar en los dispositivos que se describen en este documento, en conformidad con los requisitos de la Norma Oficial Mexicana(NOM):

Importador:

Dell Mexico S.A. de C.V. AV PASEO DE LA REFORMA NO 2620 PISO 11 COL. LOMAS ALTAS MEXICO DF CP 11950 Modelo Voltaje de alimentacin Frecuencia Consumo de corriente de entrada Voltaje de salida Consumo de corriente de salida Pas de origen W13B 100 V CA240 V CA 50 Hz60 Hz 1,70 A 19,50 V CC 3,34 A Hecho en China 2014 Dell Inc. 2014 Microsoft Corporation. Printed in China. 2014-04 8 9 1. Camera-status light 2. Camera 3. Microphone 4. Power button 5. Volume-control buttons (2) 6. Menu button 7. Exit button 8. Regulatory label 9. Service Tag label 10. Camera-status light 11. Power-adapter port 12. Headset port 13. USB 2.0 port 14. HDMI port 15. Network port 16. USB 2.0 ports (2) 17. Media-card reader 1. Camera-status light 2. Camera 3. Microphone 4. Power button 5. Volume-control buttons (2) 6. Menu button 7. Exit button 8. Regulatory label 9. Service Tag label 10. Camera-status light 11. Power-adapter port 12. Headset port 13. USB 2.0 port 14. HDMI port 15. Network port 16. USB 2.0 ports (2) 17. Media-card reader 1. Camera-status light 2. Camera 3. Microphone 4. Power button 5. Volume-control buttons (2) 6. Menu button 7. Exit button 8. Regulatory label 9. Service Tag label 10. Camera-status light 11. Power-adapter port 12. Headset port 13. USB 2.0 port 14. HDMI port 15. Network port 16. USB 2.0 ports (2) 17. Media-card reader 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 1. Camera-status light 2. Camera 3. Microphone 4. Power button 5. Volume-control buttons (2) 6. Menu button 7. Exit button 8. Regulatory label 9. Service Tag label 10. Camera-status light 11. Power-adapter port 12. Headset port 13. USB 2.0 port 14. HDMI port 15. Network port 16. USB 2.0 ports (2) 17. Media-card reader 1. Camera-status light 2. Camera 3. Microphone 4. Power button 5. Volume-control buttons (2) 6. Menu button 7. Exit button 8. Regulatory label 9. Service Tag label 10. Camera-status light 11. Power-adapter port 12. Headset port 13. USB 2.0 port 14. HDMI port 15. Network port 16. USB 2.0 ports (2) 17. Media-card reader

User Guide Product notice Software terms This guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions of Windows. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To obtain the latest information in this guide, contact support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: February 2014 Document Part Number: 753647-001 Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Starting right ...................................................................................................................................................... 1 Visit the HP Apps Store ........................................................................................................................ 1 Best practices ....................................................................................................................................... 1 Fun things to do .................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources .............................................................................................................................. 3 2 Getting to know your computer ......................................................................................................................... 5 Finding your hardware and software information ................................................................................. 5 Locating hardware ............................................................................................................... 5 Locating software ................................................................................................................. 5 Right side ............................................................................................................................................. 6 Left side ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Display .................................................................................................................................................. 9 Changing your notebook to an entertainment stand .......................................................... 10 Changing your notebook to a tablet ................................................................................... 10 Top ..................................................................................................................................................... 11 TouchPad .......................................................................................................................... 11 Lights ................................................................................................................................. 12 Speakers ............................................................................................................................ 12 Keys ................................................................................................................................... 13 Labels ................................................................................................................................................. 13 3 Connecting to a network ................................................................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................... 15 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 15 Using the wireless button .................................................................................. 15 Using operating system controls ....................................................................... 16 Sharing data and drives and accessing software .............................................................. 16 Using a WLAN ................................................................................................................... 16 Using an Internet service provider .................................................................... 17 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................ 17 Configuring a wireless router ............................................................................ 17 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................... 17 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................... 18 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................ 18 Inserting and removing a SIM (select models only) .......................................... 19 v Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) ..................................................... 20 Connecting to a wired network ........................................................................................................... 20 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) ......................................................................... 20 4 Enjoying entertainment features ..................................................................................................................... 21 Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 21 Using the webcam .............................................................................................................................. 22 Using audio ........................................................................................................................................ 23 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................... 23 Connecting headphones and microphones ....................................................................... 23 Using Beats Audio ............................................................................................................. 23 Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel ............................................................... 23 Enabling and disabling Beats Audio .................................................................. 23 Testing your audio features ............................................................................................... 23 Using video ......................................................................................................................................... 24 Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable ........................................................... 24 Setting up HDMI audio ...................................................................................... 25 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays ............................. 25 5 Navigating the screen ..................................................................................................................................... 26 Using the TouchPad and gestures ..................................................................................................... 26 Tapping .............................................................................................................................. 27 Scrolling ............................................................................................................................. 28 2-finger pinch zoom ........................................................................................................... 28 2-finger click ....................................................................................................................... 29 Edge swipes ...................................................................................................................... 29 Right-edge swipe .............................................................................................. 29 Left-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 30 Top-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 30 Using touch screen gestures .............................................................................................................. 31 One-finger slide ................................................................................................................. 31 Tapping .............................................................................................................................. 32 Scrolling ............................................................................................................................. 32 2-finger pinch zoom ........................................................................................................... 33 Edge swipes ...................................................................................................................... 34 Right-edge swipe .............................................................................................. 34 Left-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 34 Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe .......................................................... 35 Using the keyboard and mouse .......................................................................................................... 35 Using the keys ................................................................................................................... 35 Using the action keys ........................................................................................ 35 vi Using Windows shortcut keys ........................................................................... 36 Using the hot keys ............................................................................................. 37 6 Managing power ............................................................................................................................................. 38 Initiating Sleep and Hibernation ......................................................................................................... 38 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep .................................................................................. 39 Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) ....................................... 39 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 39 Using the power meter and power settings ........................................................................................ 40 Running on battery power .................................................................................................................. 40 Factory-sealed battery ....................................................................................................... 40 Finding battery information ................................................................................................ 40 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 40 Identifying low battery levels .............................................................................................. 41 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................. 41 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ........................ 41 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ..................... 41 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....... 41 Running on external AC power .......................................................................................................... 41 Troubleshooting power problems ...................................................................................... 42 HP CoolSense .................................................................................................................................... 43 Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) .......... 43 Shutting down (turning off) the computer ........................................................................................... 43 7 Maintaining your computer .............................................................................................................................. 45 Improving performance ...................................................................................................................... 45 Using HP 3D DriveGuard ................................................................................................... 45 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status ................................................................ 45 Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 45 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 46 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 46 Cleaning your computer ..................................................................................................................... 46 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................... 47 Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) .............................................. 47 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................... 47 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse ................................................... 47 Traveling with or shipping your computer ........................................................................................... 47 8 Securing your computer and information ........................................................................................................ 49 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 49 vii Setting Windows passwords .............................................................................................. 50 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................. 50 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................... 50 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................... 51 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................... 51 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................. 51 Installing critical security updates ...................................................................................... 51 Installing HP and third-party software updates .................................................................. 51 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................... 52 Backing up your software applications and information ..................................................................... 52 Using an optional security cable lock ................................................................................................. 52 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ............................................................ 53 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................... 53 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 53 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 53 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 54 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ...................................................................................... 54 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device ............................... 55 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering .......................................................................................................... 56 Creating recovery media and backups ............................................................................................... 56 Creating HP Recovery media ............................................................................................ 56 Restore and recovery ......................................................................................................................... 57 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager .......................................................................... 58 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 58 Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) ...................................... 58 Using HP Recovery media to recover ............................................................... 59 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................... 59 Removing the HP Recovery partition ................................................................................. 59 11 Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 60 Input power ......................................................................................................................................... 60 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 60 12 Electrostatic Discharge ................................................................................................................................. 61 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 62 viii 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your computer, and where to find additional HP resources. Visit the HP Apps Store The HP Apps Store offers a wide choice of popular games, entertainment and music apps, productivity apps, and apps exclusive to HP that you can download to the Start screen. The selection is updated regularly and includes regional content and country-specific offers. Be sure to check the HP Apps Store frequently for new and updated features. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the HP Apps Store. To view and download an app:

1. 2. 3. From the Start screen, select the Store app. Select HP Picks to view all the available apps. Select the app you want to download, and then follow the on-screen instructions. When the download is complete, the app appears on the All apps screen. Best practices To get the most out of your smart investment, after you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps:

If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 15. Take a minute to browse the printed Windows Basics guide to explore the new Windows features. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 5 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 21. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 51. Back up your hard drive by creating recovery discs or a recovery flash drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 56. Fun things to do You know that you can watch a YouTube video on the computer. But did you know that you can also connect your computer to a TV or gaming console? For more information, see Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable on page 24. You know that you can listen to music on the computer. But did you know that you can also stream live radio to the computer and listen to music or talk radio from all over the world? See Using audio on page 23. Visit the HP Apps Store 1 You know that you can create a powerful presentation with Microsoft applications. But did you know you can also connect to a projector to share your ideas with a group? See Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable on page 24. Experience music the way the artist intended, with deep controlled bass and clear, pure sound. See Using Beats Audio on page 23. Use the TouchPad and the new Windows touch gestures for smooth control of images and pages of text. See Using the TouchPad and gestures on page 26. 2 Chapter 1 Starting right More HP resources You have already used Setup Instructions to turn on the computer and locate this guide. To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Overview of using Windows A broad range of how-to information and troubleshooting tips Online chat with an HP technician Email support Support telephone numbers HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including proper battery disposal information Specific warranty information about this computer Resource Setup Instructions Windows Basics guide Help and Support To access Help and Support, from the Start screen, type help, and then from the Search window, select Help and Support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Worldwide support To get support in your language, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My computer, and then select User guides. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this guide:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Limited Warranty*

To access this guide:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My computer, and then select Warranty and services. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments.

*You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD/DVD provided in the box. In some countries/regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For countries/regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

North America: Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd., Boise, ID 83714, USA More HP resources 3 Resource Contents Europe, Middle East, Africa: Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9, 20063, Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy Asia Pacific: Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/

contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. 4 Chapter 1 Starting right 2 Getting to know your computer Finding your hardware and software information Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select System, and then click Device Manager in the left column. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. To find out information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc. Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

From the Start screen, click the down arrow in the lower-left corner of the screen. Finding your hardware and software information 5 Right side Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Hard drive light Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. NOTE: For information about HP 3D DriveGuard, see Using HP 3D DriveGuard on page 45. SIM slot (select models only) Supports a wireless subscriber identity module (SIM). Memory card reader Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the slot, insert the card into the slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card it until it pops out. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. USB 2.0 port USB 3.0 port HDMI port RJ-45 (network) jack/status lights Connects a network cable.

(8) AC adapter light White: The network is connected. Amber: Activity is occurring on the network. On: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charged. Off: The computer is using battery power.

(9) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Left side Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer.

(2) Power button NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. From the Start screen, type power, select Power and sleep settings, and then select Power and sleep from the list of applications. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power. Power light

(3)

(4)

(5) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. USB 2.0 port NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Left side 7 Component

(6) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Description Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-in (microphone).

(7) Volume button Controls speaker volume. To decrease speaker volume, press the edge of the button. To increase speaker volume, press the + edge of the button. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Display Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) WWAN antennas (2)* (select models only) Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide area networks (WWAN). Webcam light Webcam Internal microphone WLAN antenna*

Internal display switch On: The webcam is in use. Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To use the webcam, from the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Records sound. Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Turns off the display and initiates Sleep if the display is closed while the power is on. NOTE: The internal display switch is not visible from the outside of the computer.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Your computer can function as a classic notebook, and in addition, the display can be rotated so that the computer transforms into an entertainment stand or a tablet. Display 9 Changing your notebook to an entertainment stand To change your notebook to an entertainment stand, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward to a stand position (about 315 degrees). Changing your notebook to a tablet To change your notebook to a tablet, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward until it is flush with the computer bottom (360 degrees). 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Top TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad zone Moves the on-screen pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Description Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button NOTE: The TouchPad also supports edge-swipe gestures. For more information, see Edge swipes on page 29. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Top 11 Lights Component Description

(1)

(2) Caps lock light Mute light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the keys to all capital letters. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. Speakers Component Speakers (2) Description Produce sound. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Keys Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Labels esc key fn key Windows key Description Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the b key, the spacebar, or the esc key. Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. Important system information is located on the bottom of the computer. The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you will probably be asked for the serial number, and possibly for the product number or the model number. Locate these numbers before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Labels 13 Component

(1)

(2) Serial number Product number

(3) Warranty period

(4) Model number (select models only) Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select models only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth device (select models only)Creates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, see the information and website links provided in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using the operating system controls. For more information, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button and one or more wireless devices, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless devices are on when you turn on the computer. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Connecting to a wireless network 15 Using operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

1. 2. For more information, from the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. Sharing data and drives and accessing software When your computer is part of a network, you are not limited to using only the information that is stored in your computer. Network computers can exchange software and data with each other. NOTE: When a disc like a DVD movie or game is copy-protected, it cannot be shared. To share folders or content on the same network:

1. 2. From the Windows desktop, open File Explorer. From This PC, click a folder with content you want to share. Select Share from the navigation bar at the top of the window, and then click Specific people. Type a name in the File Sharing box, and then click Add. 3. 4. Click Share and then follow the on-screen instructions. To share drives on the same network:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Select Open Network and Sharing Center. 2. 3. Under View your active networks, select an active network. 4. Select Change advanced sharing settings to set sharing options for privacy, network discovery, file and printer sharing or other network options. Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). 16 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Using an Internet service provider When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. NOTE: Your ISP will give you a user ID and a password to use for Internet access. Record this information and store it in a safe place. Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider A wireless router (2) (purchased separately) A wireless computer (3) NOTE: Some modems have a built-in wireless router. Check with your ISP to determine what type of modem you have. The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Configuring a wireless router For help in configuring a wireless router, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. NOTE:

It is recommended that you initially connect your new wireless computer to the router by using the network cable provided with the router. When the computer successfully connects to the Internet, disconnect the cable, and access the Internet through your wireless network. Protecting your WLAN When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. If you are concerned about the security of your computer when connected to a hotspot, limit your network activities to email that is not confidential and basic Internet surfing. Wireless radio signals travel outside the network, so other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals. Take the following precautions to protect your WLAN:

Connecting to a wireless network 17 Use a firewall. A firewall checks information and requests that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. Wireless encryption uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. For more information, from the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If the device is off, the airplane mode icon displays on the Windows desktop; press the wireless button to turn the WLAN device on. From the Start screen, point to the far-right upper or lower corner of the screen to display the charms. Select Settings, and then click the network status icon. Select your WLAN from the list. 3. 4. 5. Click Connect. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Type the code, and then click Sign in to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, from the Windows desktop, right-

click the network status icon, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center. Click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 6. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use WWANs to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a cellular phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to cellular phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP supports the following technologies:

18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. LTE (Long Term Evolution), which provides access to networks supporting LTE technology. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about inserting and removing the SIM, see the Inserting and removing a SIM (select models only) on page 19 section in this chapter. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Inserting and removing a SIM (select models only) CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. Shut down the computer. To insert a SIM, follow these steps:

1. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and then gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. NOTE: The SIM in your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. 6. Reconnect external power. Connecting to a wireless network 19 7. Reconnect external devices. 8. To remove a SIM, press in on the SIM, and then remove it from the slot. Turn on the computer. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a PAN of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Bluetooth software Help. Connecting to a wired network Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 (network) cable. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. NOTE:

interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents 20 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the webcam, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, or TV, or speakers and headphones. Multimedia features Here are some of the entertainment features on your computer. Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Webcam light Webcam Description On: The webcam is in use. Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. From the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Internal microphone Records sound. HDMI port Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. Multimedia features 21 Component Description

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10) USB 3.0 port USB 2.0 ports Memory card reader SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connect an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the slot, insert the card into the slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card it until it pops out. Supports a wireless subscriber identity module

(SIM). Speakers (2) Produce sound. Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-

conductor connector that supports both audio-out

(headphone) and audio-in (microphone). Using the webcam The computer has an integrated webcam that records video and captures photographs. Some models may allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To start the webcam, from the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. For details about using the webcam, go to Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. 22 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Using audio On your computer, you can download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web

(including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 25. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones and microphones You can connect wired headphones or headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) jack on your computer. Many headsets with integrated microphones are commercially available. To connect wireless headphones or headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Using Beats Audio Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. You can experience Beats Audio through the computer's internal speakers, through external speakers connected to a USB port, or through Beats Audio headphones connected to the headphone jack. Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel Use Beats Audio Control Panel to view and manually control audio and bass settings. From Start screen, type c, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. Enabling and disabling Beats Audio To enable or disable Beats Audio, press the fn key in combination with the b key. Testing your audio features To check the audio functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. When the Sound window opens, select the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and then click Test. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. Using audio 23 Save the file to your desktop. From the Start screen, type sound, and then select Sound Recorder. To check the recording functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. 3. 4. Open a multimedia program and play the recording. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. Your computer has a high-definition multimedia interface (HDMI) port, which allows you to connect a high-definition monitor or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Check the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, sold separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions. 1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. 3. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

24 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE: For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, adjust the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Swipe from the right edge of the Start screen, tap Devices, tap Project, and then follow the on-

screen instructions. or Point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the Start screen to display the charms, click Devices, click Project, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using video 25 5 Navigating the screen You can navigate the computer screen in the following ways:

Touch gestures Keyboard and mouse Touch gestures can be used on your computer TouchPad or on a touch screen. NOTE: An external USB mouse (purchased separately) can be connected to one of the USB ports on the computer. Review the Windows Basics guide included with your computer. The guide provides information about common tasks using the TouchPad, touch screen, or the keyboard. Your computer model has special action keys or hot key functions on the keyboard to perform routine tasks. Using the TouchPad and gestures The TouchPad allows you to navigate the computer screen and control the pointer by using simple finger movements. You can customize the touch gestures by changing settings, button configurations, click speed, and pointer options. You can also view demonstrations of TouchPad gestures. From the Start screen, type control panel, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. TIP: Use the left and right buttons on the TouchPad as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. NOTE: TouchPad gestures are not supported in all apps. 26 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the tap function on the TouchPad. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. Using the TouchPad and gestures 27 Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. 2-finger pinch zoom 2-finger pinch zoom allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers apart. 28 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen 2-finger click 2-finger click allows you to make menu selections for an object on the screen. NOTE: Using 2-finger click is the same action as using right-click with the mouse. Place two fingers on the TouchPad zone and press down to open the options menu for the selected object. Edge swipes Edge swipes allow you to perform tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe reveals the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Swipe your finger gently from the right edge to reveal the charms. Using the TouchPad and gestures 29 Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe accesses your recently opened apps so that you can switch between them quickly. Swipe your finger gently from the left edge of the TouchPad. Top-edge swipe The top-edge swipe displays app command options that allow you to customize apps. IMPORTANT: When an app is active, the top-edge gesture varies depending on the app. Gently swipe your gently from the top edge to reveal the app command options. 30 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Using touch screen gestures A touch screen computer allows you to control items on the screen directly with your fingers. TIP: On touch screen computers, you can perform the gestures on the screen or on the TouchPad. You can also perform on-screen actions with the keyboard and mouse. One-finger slide The one-finger slide is mostly used to pan or scroll through lists and pages, but you can use it for other interactions, too, such as moving an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. NOTE: When many apps are displayed on the Start screen, you can slide your finger to move the screen left or right. To drag, press and hold an object, and then drag the object to move it. Using touch screen gestures 31 Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the tap function. Use one finger to tap an object on the screen to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving the pointer up, down, left, or right on a page or image. Place two fingers on the screen and then drag them in an up, down, left, or right motion. 32 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen 2-finger pinch zoom 2-finger pinch zoom allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the screen and then moving your fingers apart. Using touch screen gestures 33 Edge swipes With edge swipes you can perform tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe reveals the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Gently swipe your finger inward from the right edge of the display onto the screen to reveal the charms. Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe reveals your open apps so that you can switch to them quickly. Gently swipe your finger inward from the left edge of the display to switch between apps. Without lifting your finger, swipe back toward the left edge to reveal all open apps. 34 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe The top-edge swipe or bottom-edge swipe displays app command options that allow you to customize apps. IMPORTANT: When an app is open, the top-edge gesture varies depending on the app. Gently swipe your finger from the top edge or the bottom edge to reveal the app command options. Using the keyboard and mouse The keyboard and mouse allow you to type, select items, scroll and to perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. on the keyboard allows you to quickly return to the Start screen from TIP: The Windows key an open app or the Windows desktop. Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. Using the keys You can quickly access information or perform functions by using certain keys and key combinations. Using the action keys An action key performs an assigned function. The icon on each of the f1 through f4 keys and the f6 through f12 keys illustrates the assigned function for that key. To use an action key function, press and hold the key. CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Using the keyboard and mouse 35 The action key feature is enabled at the factory. You can disable this feature in Setup Utility (BIOS). See Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) on page 53 for instructions on opening Setup Utility (BIOS), and then follow the instructions at the bottom of the screen. After you have disabled the action key feature, you can still perform each function by pressing the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. Icon Key f1 f2 f3 f4 f6 f7 f8 f9 f10 f11 f12 Description Opens Help and Support, which provides tutorials, information about the Windows operating system and your computer, answers to questions, and updates to your computer. Help and Support also provides automated troubleshooting tools and access to support. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Decreases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a BD. Begins, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Using Windows shortcut keys Windows provides shortcuts so that you can perform actions quickly. Press the Windows key alone or in combination with a specific key to perform a designated action. For commonly used shortcuts, use the Windows Basics guide. 36 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Using the hot keys A hot key is a combination of the fn key and the esc key, the b key, or the spacebar. To use a hot key:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the combination. Using the keyboard and mouse 37 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power only and an AC power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Your computer supports an optimal power plan to manage how your computer uses and conserves power so that computer performance is balanced with power conservation. Initiating Sleep and Hibernation Microsoft Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity when running on battery power or on external power. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 39. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. NOTE: You can manually initiate Hibernation. See Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 39 and Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) on page 39. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. 38 Chapter 6 Managing power Manually initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Close the display. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Sleep. To exit Sleep:

Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, open the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap or swipe the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password before the computer will return to the screen. Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) From the Start screen, type power options, then select Power options. In the left pane, click Choose what the power button does. You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. 5. Click Save changes. When the computer exits Hibernation, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows In the When I press the power button area, select Hibernate. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

From the Start screen, type power options, then select Power options. 1. 2. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). NOTE:

If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. Initiating Sleep and Hibernation 39 Using the power meter and power settings The power meter is located on the Windows desktop. The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To reveal the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, on the Windows desktop, point over the power meter icon. To use Power Options, click the power meter icon and select an item from the list. From the Start screen, you can also type power options, and then select Power Options. Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. If the computer has a charged battery installed and the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer, the computer automatically switches to battery power and the screen brightness decreases to conserve battery life. The battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in Help and Support. To access battery information, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, and then select Battery and performance. If Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. Do not attempt to remove or replace the factory-sealed battery. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If the battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Finding battery information To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in HP Support Assistant. To access battery information, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, and then select Battery and performance. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery test Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power Tips for conserving battery power and maximizing battery life:

Lower the brightness on the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. 40 Chapter 6 Managing power Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the power meter icon on the Windows desktop shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE: For additional information about the power meter, see Using the power meter and power settings on page 40. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect an AC adapter. Connect an optional docking or expansion device. Connect an optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. 2. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Running on external AC power For information about connecting to AC power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to AC external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking/expansion device. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

Running on external AC power 41 WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a disc (select models only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external AC power:

The battery begins to charge. The screen brightness increases. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The screen brightness automatically decreases to save battery life. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. Troubleshooting power problems Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights are off. To test the AC adapter:

1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Shut down the computer. Turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, check the connection from the AC adapter to the computer and the connection from the AC adapter to the AC outlet to be sure that the connections are secure. If the connections are secure and the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact support for information about obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. 42 Chapter 6 Managing power HP CoolSense automatically detects when the computer is not on a horizontal surface and HP CoolSense adjusts performance and fan settings to keep the surface temperature of your computer at the optimum level of comfort. When HP CoolSense is off, the position of the computer is not detected and the performance and fan options remain at the factory setting. As a result, the surface temperature of the computer might be higher than it would be with HP CoolSense on. To turn CoolSense off or on, follow these steps:

From the Start screen, type coolsense, and then select HP CoolSense. Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) When the computer is in the Sleep state, Intel Smart Connect Technology periodically causes the computer to exit Sleep. If a network connection is available, Smart Connect updates open apps such as your email inboxes, social network sites, and news pages and then returns the computer to the Sleep state. Smart Connect also syncs content that you have created offline, such as emails. When the computer exits Sleep, you have immediate access to your updated information. To enable this feature or manually adjust the settings, from the Start screen, type smart, and then select Intel Smart Connect Technology. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Although you can turn off the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command:

NOTE:

Hibernation before shutdown is possible by briefly pressing the power button. 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. 3. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Shut down. or HP CoolSense 43 Right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen, select Shut down, and then select Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, click the Power icon, and then select Shut Down. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. 44 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter provides information about improving the performance of your computer by running tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides information about updating your programs and drivers, instructions for cleaning your computer, and tips for traveling with your computer. Improving performance Everyone wants a fast computer and you can drastically improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using HP 3D DriveGuard HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Because solid state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, they do not require HP 3D DriveGuard protection. NOTE: A hard drive in a primary hard drive bay or a secondary hard drive bay is protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. For more information, see the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive is parked. To determine whether the drive is currently protected or whether it is parked, view the icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, or in the Mobility Center. Using Disk Defragmenter As you use your computer over time, the files on the hard drive become fragmented. A fragmented drive means data on your drive is not contiguous (sequential) and, because of this, the hard drive works harder to locate files, thus slowing down the computer. Disk Defragmenter consolidates (or physically reorganizes) the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. After you start Disk Defragmenter, it works without supervision. However, depending on the size of your hard drive and the number of fragmented files, Disk Defragmenter may take more than an hour to complete. Improving performance 45 HP recommends defragmenting your hard drive at least once a month. You may set Disk Defragmenter to run on a monthly schedule, but you can defragment your computer manually at any time. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Connect the computer to AC power. From the Start screen, type disk. 2. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type disk, and then select Uninstall apps to free up disk space. Follow the on-screen instructions. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis to the latest versions. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. Technology is always changing, and updating programs and drivers allows your computer to run the latest technology available. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (for example, disposable wipes, which come in a variety of brands). Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Water with mild soap solution Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. 46 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is turned on. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that the display is dry before closing the display. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, here are some tips to keep in mind to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards, from the computer. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. Traveling with or shipping your computer 47 When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device installed, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 48 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the non-Windows Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. IMPORTANT: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Computer viruses Unauthorized access to data Security feature Power-on password Antivirus software Firewall software Unauthorized access to Setup Utility (BIOS) settings and other system identification information Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the computer Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Unauthorized removal of the computer Software updates User password Security cable lock Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in the HP Setup Utility (BIOS) that is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every three months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, from the Start screen, type hp support assistant, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Using passwords 49 Setting Windows passwords Password User password Administrator password Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility (BIOS) contents. Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility

(BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it revealed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. NOTE:

password check, you must enter the administrator password to access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you enter the power-on password at the first Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: A power-on password is not revealed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

1. To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade 50 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, from the Start screen, type hp support assistant, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Installing software updates HP, Microsoft Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. For more information, see Updating programs and drivers on page 46. Installing critical security updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can choose whether updates are installed automatically. To change the settings, from the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select Windows Update, select Change settings, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Installing HP and third-party software updates HP recommends that you regularly update the software and drivers that were originally installed on your computer. To download the latest versions, go to http://www.hp.com/support. At this location, you can also register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Installing software updates 51 If you have installed third-party software after you purchased your computer, regularly update the software. Software companies provide software updates to their products to correct security problems and improve functionality of the software. Securing your wireless network When you set up your wireless network, always enable security features. For more information, see Protecting your WLAN on page 17. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. For more information, see Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 56. Using an optional security cable lock A security cable lock, which is purchased separately, is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Security cable locks are only one of several methods that should be employed as part of a complete security solution to help maximize theft protection. The security cable slot on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. For the location of the security cable slot on your computer, see Getting to know your computer on page 5. 1. 2. 3. Loop the security cable lock around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the security cable lock (2). Insert the security cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the security cable lock with the key. 4. Remove the key and keep it in a safe place. 52 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be revealed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Setup Utility (BIOS). 1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Main, and then make note of your current BIOS version. 3. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 53). To exit Setup Utility (BIOS) without saving your changes, use the arrow keys to select Exit, select Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Select Yes. 4. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) 53 Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. From the Start screen, type hp support assistant, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. 2. Click Updates and tune-ups, and then click Check for HP updates now. 3. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. b. NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before From the Start screen, type file, and then select File Explorer. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. 54 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 55. b. Hard drive c. BIOS 2. When the diagnostic tool opens, use the keyboard arrow keys to select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device Instructions for downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) are provided in English NOTE:

only. 1. Go to http://www.hp.com. 2. 3. Point to Support, located at the top of the page, and then click the Download Drivers. In the text box, enter the product name, and then click Go. or Click Find Now to let HP automatically detect your product. Select your computer model, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, click HP UEFI Support Environment. or Click Download, and then select Run. 4. 5. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 55 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes:

Creating recovery media and backups Restoring and recovering your system Creating recovery media and backups 1. After you successfully set up the computer, create HP Recovery media. This step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. HP Recovery media you create will provide the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system and the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image RecoveryReinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. See Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. 2. Use the Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information. For more information and steps, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Creating HP Recovery media HP Recovery Manager is a software program that offers a way to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the original operating system and the software programs installed at the factory, and then configures the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore the factory image if you replace the hard drive. Only one set of HP Recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the blank USB flash drive or the number of blank DVD discs that will be required. To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE

(rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or instead you can use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased 56 Chapter 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering separately) to create recovery discs, or you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take up to an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs. HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue, and the remaining discs will be burned. To create HP Recovery media:

1. 2. If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Recovery Media Creation, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation and level of expertise:

Windows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state. For more information and steps, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application or driver. From the Start screen, type recovery, select HP Recovery Manager, select Drivers and Applications Reinstall, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you want to reset your computer using a minimized image, you can choose the HP Minimized Image Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or HP Recovery media. Minimized Image Recovery installs only drivers and hardware-enabling applications. Other applications included in the image continue to be available for installation through the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option in HP Recovery Manager. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. If you want to recover the computer's original factory partitioning and content, you can choose the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or use the HP Recovery media that you have created. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. If you have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media to restore the factory image to the replacement drive. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. If you wish to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option. Restore and recovery 57 For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition on page 59. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you created or by using the HP Recovery partition (select models only). If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. Using HP Recovery media, you can choose from one of the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image Recovery (select models only)Reinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows System Recovery and Minimized Image Recovery. What you need to know HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. To use the Factory Reset option, you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. If the HP Recovery media does not work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data you wish to retain. Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows you to perform a system recovery or minimized image recovery without the need for recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can only be used if the hard drive is still working. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

1. Press f11 while the computer boots. or 58 Chapter 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Press and hold f11 as you press the power button. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. Using HP Recovery media to recover You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly. 1. 2. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the HP Recovery media that you created, and then restart the computer. NOTE:

computer boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 59. Follow the on-screen instructions. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the 3. Changing the computer boot order If computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection for an optical drive or a USB flash drive. To change the boot order:

1. 2. Restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. 3. 4. Insert the HP Recovery media you created. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive you want to boot from. Follow the on-screen instructions. Removing the HP Recovery partition HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you can no longer use the Windows Refresh option or the Windows option to remove everything and reinstall Windows. In addition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or Minimized Image Recovery from the HP Recovery partition. So before you remove the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery 59 11 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65W DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft 60 Chapter 11 Specifications 12 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded, and then remove the cover. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface of the component. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 61 Index Symbols/Numerics 2-finger pinch zoom TouchPad gesture 28 2-finger pinch zoom touchPad gesture 33 A AC adapter 6 AC adapter, testing 42 action keys decrease screen brightness 36 Help and Support 36 identifying 13 increase screen brightness 36 play, pause, resume 36 previous track or section 36 switch screen image 36 volume down 36 volume mute 36 volume up 36 wireless 36 antivirus software, using 51 audio features, testing 23 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) jack 8, 22 B backing up software and information 52 backups 56 battery discharging 40 low battery levels 41 battery information, finding 40 battery power 40 Beats Audio 23 Beats Audio Control Panel 23 Beats Audio hot key 23 BIOS determining version 53 downloading an update 54 updating 53 Bluetooth device 15, 20 Bluetooth label 14 62 Index boot order, changing 59 bottom 14 buttons left TouchPad 11 power 7 right TouchPad 11 C caps lock light, identifying 12 caring for your computer 46 cleaning your computer 46 components display 9 left side 7 right side 6 top 11 connecting to a WLAN 18 connector, power 6 corporate WLAN connection 18 critical battery level 41 critical security updates, installing 51 D deleted files restoring 57 Disk Cleanup software 46 Disk Defragmenter software 45 E edge-swipe gestures 29, 34 bottom-edge swipe 35 top-edge swipe 35 electrostatic discharge 61 esc key, identifying 13 external AC power, using 41 F firewall software 51 fn key, identifying 13, 37 fun things to do 1 H hard drive HP 3D DriveGuard 45 hard drive light 6 HDMI configuring audio 25 HDMI port connecting 24 identifying 6, 21 headphones and microphones, connecting 23 Hibernation exiting 39 initiated during critical battery level 41 initiating 39 high-definition devices, connecting 24, 25 hot keys description 37 using 37 HP 3D DriveGuard 45 HP and third-party software updates, installing 51 HP Mobile Broadband, disabled 19 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

(UEFI) downloading 55 using 54 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 59 starting 58 HP Recovery media creating 56 recovery 59 HP Recovery partition recovery 58 removing 59 I input power 60 installing critical security updates 51 optional security cable lock 52 internal display switch, identifying 9 internal microphone, identifying 9, 21 Internet connection setup 17 Internet security software, using 50 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 8, 22 network 6 RJ-45 (network) 6 K keyboard hot keys, identifying 37 keys action 13 esc 13 fn 13 Windows 13 L labels Bluetooth 14 regulatory 14 serial number 13 service 13 wireless certification 14 WLAN 14 LAN, connecting 20 left-edge swipe 30, 34 lights AC adapter 6 caps lock 12 hard drive 6 mute 12 power 7 RJ-45 (network) status 6 low battery level 41 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 46 Disk Defragmenter 45 memory card inserting 6 removing 6 memory card reader, identifying 6, 22 minimized image recovery 58 minimized image, creating 58 Miracast 25 mouse, external setting preferences 26 mute light, identifying 12 N network jack, identifying 6 O operating environment 60 original system recovery 58 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 50 Windows 50 ports HDMI 6, 21, 24 Miracast 25 USB 2.0 6, 7, 22 USB 3.0 6, 22 power battery 40 power button, identifying 7 power connector, identifying 6 power lights, identifying 7 product name and number, computer 13 public WLAN connection 18 R recovery discs 56, 59 HP Recovery Manager 58 media 59 options 57 starting 58 supported discs 56 system 58 USB flash drive 59 using HP Recovery media 57 recovery media creating 56 creating using HP Recovery Manager 57 recovery partition removing 59 regulatory information regulatory label 14 wireless certification labels 14 restore Windows File History 57 right-edge swipe 29, 34 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 6 RJ-45 (network) status lights, identifying 6 S scrolling TouchPad gesture 28 security cable lock, installing 52 security cable slot, identifying 7 security, wireless 17 serial number 13 serial number, computer 13 service labels, locating 13 setting password protection on wakeup 39 setup of WLAN 17 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 50 shipping the computer 47 shutdown 43 SIM inserting 19 removing 19 SIM slot, identifying 6, 22 Sleep exiting 39 initiating 39 slots memory card reader 6, 22 security cable 7 SIM 6, 22 software Disk Cleanup 46 Disk Defragmenter 45 software updates, installing 51 speakers connecting 23 identifying 12, 22 supported discs, recovery 56 system recovery 58 system restore point creating 56 T tapping TouchPad gesture 27 testing an AC adapter 42 testing audio features 23 Index 63 operating system 15 Wireless Assistant software 15 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 18 corporate WLAN connection 18 equipment needed 17 functional range 18 public WLAN connection 18 security 17 using 16 wireless network, securing 52 WLAN antenna, identifying 9 WLAN device 14, 16 WLAN label 14 WWAN antennas, identifying 9 WWAN device 18 top-edge swipe 30 touch screen gestures 34 2-finger pinch zoom 33 bottom-edge swipe 35 edge-swipe gestures 34, 35 one-finger slide 31 scrolling 32 tapping 32 top-edge swipe 35 touch screen, using 31 TouchPad buttons 11 TouchPad gestures 2-finger pinch zoom 28 scrolling 28 tapping 27 TouchPad zone, identifying 11 traveling with the computer 14, 47 turning off the computer 43 U unresponsive system 43 USB 2.0 ports, identifying 6, 7, 22 USB 3.0 ports, identifying 6, 22 using external AC power 41 using passwords 49 V vents, identifying 7 video 24 volume button 8 W webcam identifying 9, 21 using 22 webcam light, identifying 9, 21 Windows File History 57 restoring files 57 system restore point 56 Windows key, identifying 13 Windows passwords 50 Wireless Assistant software 15 wireless button 15 wireless certification label 14 wireless controls button 15 64 Index

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 20082011 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Third Edition: August 2011 First Edition: February 2011 Document Part Number: 653267-003 Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices .......................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................. 3 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Canada notices .................................................................................................................................... 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union Regulatory notices ..................................................................................................... 4 Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules .................................................................... 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Japan notices ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................... 8 South Korea notice ............................................................................................................................... 8 Mexico notice ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Singapore wireless notice .................................................................................................................... 8 Thailand WWAN wireless notice .......................................................................................................... 9 Taiwan notices ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................ 9 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 9 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................... 9 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 10 ENERGY STAR compliance .............................................................................................................. 10 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 11 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 11 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 12 iii U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 13 Canada modem statements ............................................................................................... 15 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................. 15 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 15 Voice support .................................................................................................... 16 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 16 Japan power cord notice .................................................................................................... 16 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................ 17 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 17 2 Safety notices ................................................................................................................................................ 18 Heat-related safety warning notice ..................................................................................................... 18 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................... 18 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 18 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 19 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 19 Cleaning the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 19 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................... 19 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 20 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 20 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 20 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 21 China material content declarations ................................................................................................... 21 Japan material content declaration .................................................................................................... 23 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................. 24 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 24 Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances ................................................................................... 24 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................ 24 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 25 iv 1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply on-board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, choose the procedure below that corresponds to the operating system running on your computer. For Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. For Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. For later Windows operating systems, such as Windows 7, follow these steps:

Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Device Manager. For non-Windows operating systems, follow the instructions provided by your operating system to identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device. Regulatory markings for your country or region may be located on the bottom of the product, either under the battery, under a user-removable door (or some other user-accessible location), or on the wireless or modem module. To view the FCC IDs for any radio modules in your notebook (Bluetooth, WLAN, or WWAN), follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the System Configuration menu. The FCC IDs are displayed at the bottom of the screen. 1 CAUTION: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not have an FCC ID. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Regulatory notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC where applicable CE compliance of this product is valid if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has wired and/or wireless telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of EU Directive R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards

(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family and available (in English only) either within the product documentation or at the following Web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (type the product number in the search box). The compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product:

4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices For non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth, within power class below 10 mW. For EU non-harmonized telecommunications products (if applicable, a 4-digit notified body number is inserted between CE and ! (the exclamation mark). Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. The telephone connector (not available for all products) is intended for connection to analog telephone networks. NOTE: For products with wireless LAN devices, some countries may have specific obligations or special requirements about the operation of wireless LAN networks such as indoor use only or restrictions of the channels available. Be sure that the country settings of the wireless network are correct. In France, certain restrictions apply for the 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product. This product may be used indoors for the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 13). For outdoor use, only the 2400-MHz to 2454-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 7) may be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.arcep.fr. The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS: HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The HP Mobile Broadband Module in your notebook is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. European Union Regulatory notices 5 The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennas are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The non-FCC, international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Ergonomics notice Germany Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the ergonomic requirements and are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. When a mobile computer is used for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 This device is intended for use at visual display workplaces in compliance with BildscharbV, only with external keyboard and adequate external monitor. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur which result in reduced readability. Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 Das Gert ist fr die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV nur mit externer Tastatur und geeignetem Monitor vorgesehen. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Japan notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Bluetooth devices Japan notices 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notice Mexico notice La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) este equipo puede que no cause interferencia y (2) este equipo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo interferencia que pueda ser causada por la operacin no deseada. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general in household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENERGY STAR compliance As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the EPAs enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-qualified computers:

The ENERGY STAR program for computers was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way that products achieve this goal is by using the Microsoft Windows power management feature to reduce power consumption when the product is not in use. The power management feature allows the computer to initiate a low-power or Sleep mode after a period of user inactivity. When used with an external ENERGY STAR qualified monitor, this feature also supports similar power management features of the monitor. To take advantage of these potential energy savings, the power management feature has been preset to behave in the following ways when the system is operating on AC power:

Turn off the display after 15 minutes Initiate Sleep after 30 minutes The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Laser compliance 11 U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Modem notices 13 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. Modem notices 15 c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice 16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision Corporation notice 17 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer: crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Headset and earphone volume level notice 19 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service. 20 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chemical substances 21 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its amendments. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Japan material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Japan material content declaration 23 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation In Conformity with the EEE regulation EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Index A airline travel notice 9 B battery notice 10, 18, 24 battery recycling 20 Brazil notice 4 C cable grounding notice 19 Canada modem statement 15 Canada notices 4 Canadian French notices 4 China Material Content Declarations 21 D DC plug of external HP power supply notice 17 Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 24 battery, user replacement 10 equipment 20 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 20 ENERGY STAR compliance 10 environmental notices 20 equipment disposal notice 20 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 4 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 19 J Japan material content declaration 23 Japan modem statement 15 Japan notice 7 Japan power cord notice 16 K keyboard notice 19 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice Mexico Sustainable Energy Use 17 Law 24 Mexico wireless notice 8 modem notices 11 modem statements Canada 15 Japan 15 New Zealand 15 U.S. 12 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 notices airline travel 9 battery 10, 24 battery, user replacement 18 Brazil 4 Canada 4 Canadian French 4 DC plug of external HP power supply 17 environmental 20 equipment disposal 20 ergonomics 6 European Union 4 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 19 Japan 7 Japan power cord 16 keyboard 19 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 17 Mexico 8 modem 11 perchlorate material 24 power cords 16, 19 Singapore 8 South Korea 8 Taiwan 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 travel 19 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 24 N New Zealand modem statement 15 P power cord notice 16, 19 Index 25 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 20 S Singapore wireless notice 8 South Korea notice 8 T Taiwan notice 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice travel notice 19 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 9 19 U U.S. modem statement 12 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 24 V voice support 16 volume level notice, headset and earphone 19 W wireless LAN devices 3 26 Index

Informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation Manuel de l'utilisateur Copyright 2012 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth est une marque dtenue par son propritaire et utilise sous licence par Hewlett-Packard Company. ENERGY STAR est une marque dpose du gouvernement des tats-Unis. Java est une marque dpose de Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows et Windows Vista sont des marques dposes de Microsoft Corporation aux tats-Unis. Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent tre modifies sans pravis. Les garanties relatives aux produits et aux services HP sont dcrites dans les dclarations de garantie limite expresse qui les accompagnent. Aucun lment du prsent document ne peut tre interprt comme constituant une garantie supplmentaire. HP ne saurait tre tenu pour responsable des erreurs ou omissions de nature technique ou rdactionnelle qui pourraient subsister dans le prsent document. Troisime dition : septembre 2012 Deuxime dition : juillet 2012 Premire dition : mars 2012 Rfrence du document : 689409-053 propos de ce manuel Ce manuel fournit des informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation en conformit avec les rglementations amricaines, canadiennes et internationales en matire d'ordinateurs portables, d'ordinateurs de bureau, de clients lgers et de stations de travail personnelles. AVERTISSEMENT ! Le non-respect des instructions expose l'utilisateur des risques potentiellement trs graves. ATTENTION : Le non-respect des instructions prsente des risques, tant pour le matriel que pour les informations qu'il contient. REMARQUE : Le texte ainsi dfini fournit des informations importantes supplmentaires. iii iv propos de ce manuel Sommaire 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables ................................................................................ 1 Rglementation FCC ............................................................................................................................ 3 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 3 Cbles .................................................................................................................................. 3 Dclaration de conformit des produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) ....... 4 Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules HP Mobile Broadband ........................... 4 Avis pour le Brsil ................................................................................................................................. 5 Avis pour le Canada ............................................................................................................................. 5 Avis pour l'Union europenne .............................................................................................................. 6 Dclaration de conformit .................................................................................................... 6 Produits quips de modules sans fil (EMF) ....................................................... 7 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) ................. 7 Avis sur l'ergonomie ............................................................................................ 8 Allemagne (texte en franais) ............................................................. 8 Allemagne (texte en allemand) ........................................................... 8 Avis pour le Japon ................................................................................................................................ 9 Priphriques LAN, priphriques WAN et marques de certification pour les priphriques Bluetooth ..................................................................................................... 10 Avis pour la Core du Sud ................................................................................................................. 10 Avis pour le Mexique .......................................................................................................................... 10 Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour .................................................................................... 11 Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande ................................................................... 11 Avis pour Tawan ................................................................................................................................ 11 Priphriques WLAN 802.11a ........................................................................................... 11 Priphriques WLAN 802.11b ........................................................................................... 12 Avis sur les utilisations en vol ............................................................................................................. 12 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ............................................................................ 12 Conformit ENERGY STAR ............................................................................................................ 12 Conformit du laser ............................................................................................................................ 13 Avis sur les modems .......................................................................................................................... 14 Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication ................................................. 14 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................... 14 v Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis ............................................................. 16 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................ 17 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................... 17 Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................ 17 Support vocal .................................................................................................... 18 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation .................................................................................................... 18 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon ............................................................. 18 Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP .............................................................. 18 Avis de Macrovision Corporation ........................................................................................................ 19 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles ...................................................................................................................................................... 20 Avis sur les modems .......................................................................................................................... 20 Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication ................................................. 20 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................... 21 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................ 22 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................... 22 Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................ 22 Assistance vocale ............................................................................................. 23 Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique ............................................................................................ 23 Avis de la FCC ................................................................................................................... 24 Modifications ..................................................................................................... 24 Cbles ............................................................................................................... 24 Dclaration de conformit pour les produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) ...................................................................................................... 25 Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil ............................................... 25 Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie ................................................... 25 Avis pour le Brsil .............................................................................................................. 26 Avis pour le Canada .......................................................................................................... 26 Avis pour l'Union europenne ............................................................................................ 26 Dclaration de conformit ................................................................................. 26 Produits quips de modules sans fil ............................................... 27 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/

fax) .................................................................................................... 28 Avis sur l'ergonomie ......................................................................... 28 Avis pour le Japon ............................................................................................................. 28 Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth ....................... 29 Avis pour la Core du Sud ................................................................................................. 29 Avis pour le Mexique ......................................................................................................... 30 Avis pour Tawan ............................................................................................................... 30 vi 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables ....................................................................................... 31 Notice d'avertissement relative la chaleur ....................................................................................... 31 Avis sur les risques lis la scurit .................................................................................................. 31 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ............................................................................ 32 Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs ................................................................ 32 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation .................................................................................................... 33 Nettoyage du clavier ........................................................................................................................... 33 Avis sur les dplacements .................................................................................................................. 33 Avis de scurit pour la Chine ............................................................................................................ 34 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................... 34 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales .......................................... 34 Norvge et Sude : notice de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ... 34 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles ...................................................................................................................................................... 35 Informations importantes relatives la scurit ................................................................................. 35 Conditions d'installation ...................................................................................................................... 36 Avis sur le remplacement de la batterie ............................................................................................. 36 Avis sur le volume des casques et des couteurs ............................................................................. 37 Informations de scurit relatives au laser ......................................................................................... 37 Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation ............................................. 37 Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 ............................. 37 Danemark .......................................................................................................... 38 Finlande ............................................................................................................ 38 Norvge ............................................................................................................. 38 Sude ................................................................................................................ 38 Exigences relatives l'alimentation ................................................................................... 38 Pour une utilisation en Norvge ........................................................................ 38 Cordons d'alimentation requis ........................................................................................... 39 Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon ...................................................... 39 Risque de pincement .......................................................................................................................... 39 Avis de scurit pour la Chine ............................................................................................................ 40 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................... 40 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales .......................................... 40 Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne .................................................................................................... 41 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables ...................................................... 42 Recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie ......................................................................... 42 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................... 42 Substances chimiques ....................................................................................................................... 42 Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine .............................................................................................. 43 vii Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) ....................................... 43 Dclaration de contenu de l'quipement pour le Japon ..................................................................... 46 Loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie ........................................................................... 46 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie .................................................................................................... 46 Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine ................................................... 46 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................... 46 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles .......................................................................................................................................... 47 Recyclage du matriel lectronique et des batteries .......................................................................... 47 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................... 47 Conformit ENERGY STAR (certains modles) .............................................................................. 47 Substances chimiques ....................................................................................................................... 49 Avis sur le mercure ............................................................................................................................. 49 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................... 49 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) ....................................... 49 The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................... 50 Dclarations IT ECO .......................................................................................................................... 51 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) ....................................... 52 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie) ......................................................................................................... 52 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie .................................................................................................... 52

(restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine) .............................................................................................................. 53 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 54 viii 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Ce chapitre fournit des avis de rglementation spcifiques des pays et des rgions concernant les produits filaires et sans fil, ainsi que des informations de conformit concernant l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis peuvent ne pas s'appliquer votre produit. Un ou plusieurs priphriques sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer dans les avions, dans les hpitaux, proximit d'explosifs, dans des lieux dangereux, etc. Si vous n'tes pas sr des rgles qui s'appliquent ce produit, demandez si vous pouvez l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Pour identifier un priphrique matriel, tel qu'un priphrique rseau LAN sans fil (WLAN), choisissez la procdure ci-dessous qui correspond au systme d'exploitation excut sur votre ordinateur. Sous Windows Vista, procdez comme suit :

1. Slectionnez Dmarrer > Ordinateur > Proprits systme. 2. Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Gestionnaire de priphriques. Sous Windows 7, procdez comme suit :

Slectionnez Dmarrer > Panneau de configuration > Systme et scurit > Gestionnaire de priphriques. Sous Windows 8, procdez comme suit :

1. Dans l'cran d'accueil, tapez c, puis slectionnez Panneau de configuration. 2. Slectionnez Systme et scurit, puis slectionnez Gestionnaire de priphriques dans la zone Systme. La liste de tous les priphriques installs sur votre ordinateur s'affiche. Pour les systmes d'exploitation non Windows, suivez les instructions fournies par votre systme d'exploitation pour identifier un priphrique matriel tel qu'un priphrique rseau LAN sans fil

(WLAN). Des tiquettes de rglementation spcifiques votre pays ou rgion peuvent tre apposes sous le produit : sous la batterie, sous une trappe accessible par l'utilisateur (ou tout autre emplacement accessible par l'utilisateur), sur le module sans fil ou sur le modem. 1 Sous Windows 7, pour consulter le numro d'identification FCC d'un module radio de votre ordinateur portable (par exemple, Bluetooth, WLAN ou WWAN), procdez comme suit :

1. 2. 3. Allumez ou redmarrez l'ordinateur puis appuyez sur echap lorsque le message Press the ESC key for Startup Menu (Pour accder au menu de dmarrage, appuyez sur la touche echap) s'affiche en bas de l'cran. Appuyez sur f10 pour accder au BIOS. Slectionnez le menu System Configuration (Configuration du systme). Sous Windows 8, procdez comme suit :

1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension ou redmarrez-le, puis appuyez sur la touche echap lorsque le message Press the ESC key for Startup Menu (Pour accder au menu de dmarrage, appuyez sur la touche echap) apparat en bas de l'cran. 2. Appuyez sur f10 pour accder Computer Setup. Les identifiants FCC sont affichs en bas de l'cran. ATTENTION : Les appareils qui ne sont pas destins la vente ou une utilisation aux tats-Unis ne possdent peut-tre pas d'identifiants FCC. 2 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Rglementation FCC Le prsent quipement a t test et dclar conforme aux limites d'un appareil numrique de Classe B, telles que dfinies dans l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences prjudiciables dans un environnement rsidentiel. Le prsent quipement gnre, utilise et peut mettre une nergie de radiofrquence et, s'il n'est pas install et utilis conformment aux instructions, peut entraner des interfrences prjudiciables pour les radiocommunications. Cependant, tout risque d'interfrences ne peut tre totalement exclu dans certains environnements spcifiques. Si ce matriel devait provoquer des interfrences avec une radio ou un tlviseur, ce qu'il est facile de dceler en teignant puis en rallumant ce matriel, il est alors vivement conseill l'utilisateur d'essayer de supprimer ces interfrences en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :

Rorienter ou repositionner l'antenne de rception. loigner le matriel informatique du rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique sur la prise d'un circuit autre que celui sur lequel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil un revendeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision expriment. Modifications La FCC stipule que l'utilisateur doit tre inform que toute modification opre sur l'appareil, n'ayant pas t expressment approuve par HP, peut entraner l'annulation des droits d'exploitation du produit dont bnficie l'utilisateur. Cbles Pour tre conformes la rglementation de la FCC, les connexions d'entre de l'appareil doivent tre tablies avec des cbles blinds munis d'embouts de connecteurs RFI/EMI mtalliques. Rglementation FCC 3 Dclaration de conformit des produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) Cet appareil est conforme l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Son utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes :

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interfrences nuisibles. 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toutes interfrences reues, notamment des interfrences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement non voulu. Si vous souhaitez poser des questions sur le produit qui ne sont pas en rapport avec cette dclaration, crivez l'adresse suivante :

Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000, tats-Unis Pour toute question concernant cette dclaration FCC, crivez-nous l'adresse suivante :

Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000, tats-Unis ou appelez HP au (281) 514-3333. Pour identifier le produit, reportez-vous au numro de rfrence, de srie ou de modle inscrit sur le produit. Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules HP Mobile Broadband Cet appareil ne doit pas tre situ proximit d'une autre antenne ou d'un metteur, ni fonctionner en mme temps. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux rayonnements de frquence radio La puissance de sortie mise par cet appareil est nettement infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par le FCC. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant le fonctionnement normal des tablettes et des ordinateurs portables. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'expositions aux frquences radio dictes dans la rglementation FCC, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : Pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par la FCC, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. 4 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables ATTENTION : Lorsque vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, abstenez-vous d'utiliser ce matriel l'extrieur. En effet, il fonctionne dans la plage de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. La FCC exige que ce matriel soit utilis l'intrieur pour la plage de frquences comprise entre 5,15 et 5,25 GHz, afin de rduire les risques d'interfrence avec les systmes de satellites du service mobile du canal commun. Un radar puissance leve est allou comme premier utilisateur des bandes de frquence allant de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz. Ces stations radar peuvent entraner des interfrences avec cet appareil et/ou l'endommager. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de Classe B respecte toutes les exigences des rglementations canadiennes sur les quipements pouvant causer des interfrences. Si ce priphrique est quip de fonctions WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence dictes par Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions : (1) ce priphrique ne doit pas gnrer d'interfrence et (2) ce priphrique doit supporter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient entraner un mauvais fonctionnement. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio : la puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. ATTENTION : Lorsque vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, abstenez-vous d'utiliser ce matriel l'extrieur. En effet, il fonctionne dans la plage de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce matriel soit utilis l'intrieur pour la plage de frquences comprise entre 5,15 et 5,25 GHz, afin de rduire les risques d'interfrence avec les systmes de satellites du service mobile du canal commun. Un radar puissance leve est allou comme premier utilisateur des bandes de frquence allant de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz. Ces stations radar peuvent entraner des interfrences avec cet appareil et/ou l'endommager. Les antennes de ce priphrique ne sont pas remplaables. Toute tentative d'accs par l'utilisateur endommagera l'ordinateur. Avis pour le Brsil 5 Avis pour l'Union europenne Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant la marque CE sont conformes une ou plusieurs directives de l'UE suivantes, le cas chant :

Directive relative la basse tension 2006/95/CE Directive EMC 2004/108/CE Directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE Directive R&TTE 1999/5/CE Directive RoHS 2011/65/CE La conformit CE de ce produit est uniquement valable si ce dernier est aliment par un adaptateur secteur estampill CE (le cas chant) et un cordon d'alimentation fournis par HP. Reportez-vous la section Cordons d'alimentation requis la page 39. La conformit ces directives implique la conformit aux normes europennes harmonises applicables (normes europennes) qui sont prsentes dans la dclaration de conformit de l'UE dicte par HP pour ce produit ou cette gamme de produits et disponibles soit dans la documentation du produit soit sur le site Web suivant : www.hp.eu/certificates (effectuez une recherche partir du nom de modle du produit ou de son numro de produit, accessible sur l'tiquette de conformit). La conformit est reprsente par la marque de conformit CE ci-aprs. Pour certains produits de tlcommunications, le numro 4 chiffres d'un organisme de certification peut tre ajout en suffixe. Reportez-vous l'tiquette de conformit appose sur le produit. La fonctionnalit de tlcommunications de ce produit peut tre utilise dans les pays de l'Union europenne et de l'AELE suivants : Allemagne, Autriche, Belgique, Bulgarie, Chypre, Danemark, Espagne, Estonie, Finlande, France, Grce, Hongrie, Irlande, Islande, Lettonie, Liechtenstein, Lituanie, Luxembourg, Malte, Norvge, Pays-Bas, Pologne, Portugal, Rpublique tchque, Roumanie, Royaume-Uni, Slovaquie, Slovnie, Sude et Suisse. Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, contactez Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS cette adresse : HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, ALLEMAGNE. 6 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Produits quips de modules sans fil (EMF) CET APPAREIL EST CONFORME AUX NORMES INTERNATIONALES EN MATIRE D'EXPOSITION AUX RAYONNEMENTS DE FRQUENCE RADIO. Le module sans fil intgr votre ordinateur portable est un metteur et rcepteur radio. Cet appareil est conu pour ne pas dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dfinies par des directives internationales (ICNIRP). Ces limites sont dfinies dans le cadre de directives qui tablissent les niveaux autoriss de rayonnements de frquence radio pour l'ensemble de la population. Ces directives, dictes par des organismes scientifiques indpendants, s'appuient sur une valuation rgulire et minutieuse de diffrentes tudes scientifiques. Cet appareil est galement conforme aux directives R&TTE europennes relatives la protection de la sant et de la scurit des personnes. La norme d'exposition dfinie pour les appareils mobiles utilise une unit de mesure appele SAR

(Specific Absorption Rate, taux d'absorption spcifique).* Ce taux a t obtenu via des tests au cours desquels les appareils ont effectu des transmissions au niveau de puissance certifi le plus lev, dans toutes les bandes de frquence. Le taux SAR rel de l'appareil en cours de fonctionnement peut tre bien infrieur la valeur maximale dfinie, dans la mesure o il fonctionne diffrents niveaux de puissance et utilise uniquement la puissance requise pour atteindre le rseau. Install dans l'ordinateur portable, cet appareil est conforme aux directives en matire d'exposition aux frquences radio lorsque les antennes se trouvent une distance minimale du corps. Pour transmettre des donnes ou des messages, l'appareil doit disposer d'une connexion de qualit au rseau. Dans certains cas, les transmissions de donnes ou de messages peuvent tre retardes jusqu' ce qu'une connexion soit disponible. Veillez respecter la distance conseille jusqu' la fin de la transmission.

*Les directives internationales autres que celles de la FCC indiquent que la limite SAR pour les appareils mobiles utiliss par le grand public est de 2 watts/kilogramme (W/kg), calcul sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de masse tissulaire. Ces directives incluent une marge de scurit importante pour une protection accrue du grand public et pour tenir compte des variations dans les mesures. Les valeurs SAR peuvent varier selon les exigences locales en matire de reporting et selon la bande du rseau. Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive 1999/5/CE (annexe II) sur les quipements hertziens et quipements terminaux de tlcommunications et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts

(RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. L'quipement a t conu pour fonctionner avec les rseaux DTMF analogiques. Cet quipement peut connatre des difficults d'interconnexion sur les rseaux RTPC prenant uniquement en charge la composition impulsions. Contactez votre oprateur rseau pour bnficier d'une aide supplmentaire. Avis pour l'Union europenne 7 Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne (texte en franais) Lorsqu'un ordinateur portable est utilis sur une station de travail professionnelle dans le cadre d'un travail sur cran de visualisation o la directive 90/270/CEE relative aux crans de visualisation est applicable, un clavier externe adapt est recommand. Selon l'application et le travail ralis, un moniteur externe adapt peut galement tre ncessaire pour obtenir des conditions de travail comparables celles d'une station de travail. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (certification GS volontaire) Les ordinateurs portables portant la marque d'homologation GS sont conformes aux exigences en matire d'ergonomie. Sans clavier externe, ils sont uniquement adapts aux tches ponctuelles sur cran de visualisation. Une utilisation mobile dans de mauvaises conditions de luminosit (par exemple, lumire directe du soleil) peut occasionner des reflets et donc rduire la lisibilit. Allemagne (texte en allemand) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. 8 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis pour le Japon Avis pour le Japon 9 Priphriques LAN, priphriques WAN et marques de certification pour les priphriques Bluetooth This product contains certified radio equipment. Avis pour la Core du Sud Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Si su producto se brinda con accesorios inalmbricos como un teclado o un mouse y necesita identificar el modelo del accesorio, consulte la etiqueta incluida en ese accesorio. 10 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour Mettez hors tension les priphriques WWAN lorsque vous tes bord d'avions. L'utilisation de ces appareils bord d'avions est illgale, peut tre dangereuse pour le fonctionnement de l'avion et risque de perturber le rseau de tlphonie mobile. Le non-respect de cette instruction peut entraner la suspension ou le refus de services cellulaires au contrevenant, ou des actions juridiques, ou les deux. Les utilisateurs doivent limiter l'emploi d'quipement radio dans des dpts de carburant, usines chimiques et l o des explosions sont en cours. Comme pour les autres quipements mobiles de transmission par frquences radiolectriques, il est recommand aux utilisateurs, pour le bon fonctionnement de leur quipement et pour la scurit du personnel, de ne pas trop approcher les antennes du corps humain au cours du fonctionnement de l'quipement. Ce priphrique a t conu pour tre conforme aux exigences applicables pour l'exposition aux ondes radio, en fonction de normes scientifiques qui comprennent des plages destines assurer la scurit de tout le monde, quel que soit l'ge et l'tat de sant. Ces rgles d'exposition aux ondes radio utilisent une unit de mesure appele taux d'absorption spcifique (SAR - Specific Absorption Rate). Les tests relatifs aux taux d'absorption sont mens l'aide de mthodes standardises, le tlphone transmettant son niveau de certifi le plus lev dans toutes les bandes de frquences utilises. Les informations de donnes SAR se basent sur les normes EN50360 et EN50361 de CENELEC, qui utilisent la limite de 2 watts par kilogramme, sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de tissu. Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande Cet quipement de tlcommunications est conforme aux rglementations de la NTC. Avis pour Tawan Priphriques WLAN 802.11a Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour 11 Priphriques WLAN 802.11b Avis sur les utilisations en vol L'utilisation d'quipement lectronique bord d'un avion commercial est laisse la discrtion de la compagnie arienne. Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur Lorsqu'une batterie atteint la fin de sa vie utile, ne la jetez pas avec les dchets mnagers ordinaires. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries d'ordinateur. HP encourage ses clients recycler les quipements lectroniques usags, les cartouches d'impression HP d'origine et les batteries rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site Web HP l'adresse http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour des informations sur le retrait d'une batterie remplaable par l'utilisateur, reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur livr avec le produit. Conformit ENERGY STAR En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, HP a suivi le processus avanc de qualification et de certification des produits de l'EPA pour s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR respectaient les rglementations ENERGY STAR en matire de rendement lectrique. Le logo suivant apparat sur tous les ordinateurs respectant les spcifications ENERGY STAR :

Le programme ENERGY STAR pour les ordinateurs a t cr par l'EPA pour encourager l'efficacit nergtique et rduire la pollution atmosphrique grce l'utilisation d'quipements meilleur 12 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables rendement lectrique chez soi, au bureau et dans les usines. Une manire d'atteindre cet objectif consiste utiliser la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation de Microsoft Windows pour rduire la consommation d'nergie lorsque le produit n'est pas utilis. Cette fonction permet la mise en mode veille de l'ordinateur aprs une priode d'inactivit de l'utilisateur. Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction avec un moniteur conforme au programme ENERGY STAR, les fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation du moniteur sont galement prises en charge. Pour profiter de ces conomies d'nergie potentielles, la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation est prconfigure comme suit lorsque le systme fonctionne sur secteur :

Dsactivation de l'cran aprs 10 minutes Mise en veille aprs 20 minutes Le mode veille est dsactiv par une simple pression sur le bouton d'alimentation/de veille. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN d'veil par appel rseau est active, le mode veille peut galement tre dsactiv en rponse un signal du rseau. Vous trouverez des informations complmentaires sur les conomies nergtiques et financires ralisables avec la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation sur le site Web du programme ENERGY STAR de l'U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), cette adresse http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Vous trouverez galement des informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses avantages pour l'environnement sur le site Web ENERGY STAR de l'U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), cette adresse http://www.energystar.gov. Conformit du laser AVERTISSEMENT ! L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation d'appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de pice rparable par l'utilisateur. N'utilisez pas de commandes, n'excutez aucun rglage ni aucune procdure au priphrique laser autre que ceux qui figurent dans le manuel d'installation du produit laser. Seul un mainteneur agr est autoris rparer l'unit. Ce produit peut tre fourni avec un priphrique de stockage optique (par exemple, un lecteur de CD ou DVD) et/ou un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Chacun de ces appareils qui contient un laser est class comme produit laser de classe 1 conformment la norme CEI/EN 60825-1 et rpond aux critres de scurit de cette norme. Chaque produit laser est conforme aux paragraphes 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 des rglementations FDA des tats-Unis ou est conforme ces rglementations l'exception des dviations relatives l'avis sur le laser No. 50, en date du 24 juin 2007. Conformit du laser 13 Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, d'lectrocution et de blessures pendant l'utilisation de cet appareil, suivez systmatiquement les rgles de scurit de base suivantes :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe en effet un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil pour signaler une fuite de gaz, si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si cet appareil n'a pas t fourni avec un cordon tlphonique, n'utilisez qu'un cordon tlphonique No. 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez pas un cble de modem ou de tlphone dans la prise rseau (RJ-45). GARDEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication Le priphrique de tlcommunication de votre ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont le certificat d'homologation apparat sur l'tiquette du produit appose sur la base de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Pour vrifier que ce matriel est configur pour le pays ou la rgion o il se trouve, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation qui l'accompagne. Si vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion autre que celui ou celle dans lequel se trouve le modem, il risque de violer les lois de tlcommunication du pays ou de la rgion. De plus, votre modem risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous ne slectionnez pas le bon pays ou la bonne rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que ce pays ou cette rgion n'est pas compatible, c'est que le modem n'a pas t agr dans ce pays ou cette rgion et ne doit donc pas tre utilis. Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Cet quipement est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette appose sur la face infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem comporte, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format amricain : AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous le demande. Homologation applicable prise USOC = RJ11C. Les prises utilises pour connecter cet quipement aux cbles lectriques des lieux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions approuves par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une prise modulaire conformes FCC sont livrs avec cet quipement. Il est conu pour tre branch sur une prise modulable galement conforme. Pour des dtails, reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation. Le REN permet de dterminer le nombre de priphriques pouvant tre raccords sur une ligne tlphonique. Si un nombre excessif d'appareils est prsent sur la ligne tlphonique, ceux-ci risquent de ne pas rpondre un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des cas (mais pas toujours), la somme des REN des priphriques raccords sur une ligne ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour tre sr du nombre d'appareils pouvant tre connects une mme ligne (dtermin par le numro REN), contactez la compagnie de tlphone locale. Pour les produits agrs aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN 14 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables fait partie de l'identificateur du produit qui est au format amricain : AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs cette date, le REN est affich sparment sur l'tiquette. Si cet quipement HP dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie de tlphone vous avisera par avance qu'une interruption de service peut tre requise. Si la compagnie de tlphone ne peut pas vous aviser par avance, vous serez inform ds que possible. Vous serez galement inform de vos droits de rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous le jugez ncessaire. La compagnie de tlphone peut apporter des modifications ses quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement de votre matriel. Si cela se produit, la compagnie de tlphone vous informera par avance pour vous permettre d'apporter les modifications requises afin d'assurer un service tlphonique sans interruption. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu'

ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. Le raccord des lignes partages est soumis aux tarifs en vigueur dans votre pays. Pour plus d'informations, contactez les commissions d'utilit publique, la commission de service public ou les commissions d'entreprise. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de cet quipement HP ne dsactive pas ce dispositif. Si vous avez des questions sur ce qui peut dsactiver le dispositif d'alarme, consultez votre compagnie de tlphone ou un installateur qualifi. La loi de 1991 sur la protection des usagers du tlphone interdit l'utilisation d'un ordinateur ou de tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris les tlcopieurs, pour l'envoi d'un message, moins que ne soit inscrit clairement sur ce message (dans la marge, le haut ou le bas de chaque page ou sur la premire page) la date et l'heure de l'envoi ainsi que l'identit de la socit expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier. Le numro de tlphone ne doit pas tre un numro commenant par 900 ni un numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance. Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, reportez-vous aux instructions relatives au logiciel d'envoi de tlcopies. Avis sur les modems 15 Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Reportez-vous aux dclarations du fabricant du modem ci-aprs pour le modem install dans votre ordinateur :

16 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux spcifications techniques d'Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN indique le nombre maximal d'appareils pouvant tre connects une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison d'appareils quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si la marque de certification japonaise ne figure pas sur la base de l'ordinateur, reportez-vous la certification ci-dessous. La marque de certification japonaise pour le modem fax/donnes V.92 56K figure ci-dessous :

Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom, et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge par la ligne de la composition impulsions. L'utilisation de la numrotation par impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. *Si ce type de problme se produit, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter les services techniques de Telecom Nouvelle-Zlande. Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. Le matriel associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. Seules 10 tentatives d'appel maximum peuvent tre effectues au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes, pour n'importe quelle initialisation manuelle d'appel. b. Un intervalle minimum de 30 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Avis sur les modems 17 c. d. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont effectus divers numros, un intervalle minimum de 5 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Le matriel doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). Support vocal Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation doit tre au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi sur la protection de la vie prive de 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence (111) mis en place par Telecom. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation Si votre ordinateur ne vous a pas t livr avec un cordon d'alimentation ou un accessoire d'alimentation secteur compatible avec votre ordinateur, vous devrez acheter un cordon d'alimentation homologu pour votre pays ou votre rgion. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre test et garanti pour le produit, pour la tension et le type de courant inscrits sur l'tiquette des valeurs nominales lectriques du produit. Les valeurs nominales de tension et d'intensit du cordon doivent tre suprieures celles indiques sur l'ordinateur. En outre, le diamtre du cordon doit tre au minimum de 0,75 mm/18 AWG et sa longueur doit tre comprise entre 1,5 m (5 pieds) et 2 m (6.5 pieds). Si vous avez des questions sur le type de cordon d'alimentation utiliser, contactez votre fournisseur de service agr. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation de sorte qu'il ne puisse pas tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise secteur et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier du portable. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP 18 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis de Macrovision Corporation Ce produit intgre une technologie de protection des droits d'auteur qui est protge par des revendications de procd de certains brevets amricains et d'autres droits sur la proprit intellectuelle de Macrovision Corporation et d'autres bnficiaires de droits. L'utilisation de cette technologie de protection des droits d'auteur doit tre autorise par Macrovision Corporation et a pour but de permettre un visionnage domestique et d'autres utilisations limites uniquement, sauf autorisation de Macrovision Corporation. L'ingnierie inverse et le dsassemblage sont interdits. Avis de Macrovision Corporation 19 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, d'lectrocution et de blessures pendant l'utilisation de cet appareil, suivez systmatiquement les rgles de scurit de base suivantes :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe en effet un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil, pour signaler une fuite de gaz, si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si cet appareil n'a pas t fourni avec un cordon tlphonique, n'utilisez qu'un cordon tlphonique No. 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez jamais un cordon de modem ou de tlphone dans la prise RJ-45 (rseau Ethernet). GARDEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication Le priphrique de tlcommunication de votre ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont le certificat d'homologation apparat sur l'tiquette du produit appose sur la base de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Pour vrifier que ce matriel est configur pour le pays ou la rgion o il se trouve, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation qui l'accompagne. Si vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion autre que celui ou celle dans lequel se trouve le modem, il risque de violer les lois de tlcommunication du pays ou de la rgion. De plus, votre modem risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous ne slectionnez pas le bon pays ou la bonne rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que ce pays ou cette rgion n'est pas support, c'est que le modem n'a pas t agr dans ce pays ou cette rgion et ne doit donc pas tre utilis. 20 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Cet quipement est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette appose sur la face infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem comporte, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous le demande. Homologation applicable prise USOC = RJ11C. Les prises utilises pour connecter cet quipement aux cbles lectriques des lieux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions approuves par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une prise modulaire conformes FCC sont livrs avec cet quipement. Il est conu pour tre branch sur une prise modulable galement conforme. Pour des dtails, reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation. Le REN permet de dterminer le nombre de priphriques pouvant tre raccords sur une ligne tlphonique. Si un nombre excessif d'appareils est prsent sur la ligne tlphonique, ceux-ci risquent de ne pas rpondre un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des cas (mais pas toujours), la somme des REN des priphriques raccords sur une ligne ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour tre sr du nombre d'appareils pouvant tre connects une mme ligne (dtermin par le numro REN), contactez la compagnie de tlphone locale. Pour les produits agrs aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN fait partie de l'identificateur du produit qui est au format amricain : AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs cette date, le REN est affich sparment sur l'tiquette. Si cet quipement HP dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie de tlphone vous avisera par avance qu'une interruption de service peut tre requise. Si la compagnie de tlphone ne peut pas vous aviser par avance, vous serez inform ds que possible. Vous serez galement inform de vos droits de rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous le jugez ncessaire. La compagnie de tlphone peut apporter des modifications ses quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement de votre matriel. Si cela se produit, la compagnie de tlphone vous informera par avance pour vous permettre d'apporter les modifications requises afin d'assurer un service tlphonique sans interruption. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu'

ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. Le raccord des lignes partages est soumis aux tarifs en vigueur dans votre pays. Pour plus d'informations, contactez les commissions d'utilit publique, la commission de service public ou les commissions d'entreprise. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de cet quipement HP ne dsactive pas ce dispositif. Si vous avez des questions sur ce qui peut dsactiver le dispositif d'alarme, consultez votre compagnie de tlphone ou un installateur qualifi. La loi de 1991 sur la protection des usagers du tlphone interdit l'utilisation d'un ordinateur ou de tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris les tlcopieurs, pour l'envoi d'un message, moins que ne soit inscrit clairement sur ce message (dans la marge, le haut ou le bas de chaque page ou sur la premire page) la date et l'heure de l'envoi ainsi que l'identit de la socit expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier. Le numro de tlphone ne doit pas tre un numro commenant par 900 ni un numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance. Avis sur les modems 21 Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, reportez-vous aux instructions relatives au logiciel d'envoi de tlcopies. Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux normes techniques Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN donne une indication sur le nombre maximum de priphriques qu'il est possible de relier une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison de priphriques quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si la marque de certification japonaise ne figure pas sur la base de l'ordinateur, reportez-vous la certification ci-dessous. Au Japon, la marque de certification pour le modem LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft est la suivante :

Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom, et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge par la ligne de la composition impulsions. L'utilisation de la numrotation par impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. Si ce type de problme se produit, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter les services techniques de Telecom Nouvelle-Zlande. 22 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. Le matriel associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. Seules 10 tentatives d'appel maximum peuvent tre effectues au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes, pour n'importe quelle initialisation manuelle d'appel. b. Un intervalle minimum de 30 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. c. d. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont effectus divers numros, un intervalle minimum de 5 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Le matriel doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). Assistance vocale Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation doit tre au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi sur la protection de la vie prive de 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence (111) mis en place par Telecom. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique Ce manuel prsente les avis de rglementation relatifs aux fonctions avec et sans fil des diffrents pays et rgions, ainsi que des informations de conformit de l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-tre pas votre produit. Un ou plusieurs priphriques sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer dans les avions, dans les hpitaux, prs d'explosifs, dans des lieux dangereux, etc. Si vous n'tes pas sr des rgles qui s'appliquent ce produit, demandez si vous pouvez l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 23 Avis de la FCC Cet quipement a t test et trouv conforme aux limitations relatives aux appareils numriques de classe B, en accord avec l'article 15 des rgles de la FCC. Ces limitations sont conues pour offrir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences dans une installation rsidentielle. Cet quipement produit, utilise et peut mettre de l'nergie sous forme de radiofrquences. S'il n'est pas utilis conformment aux instructions, il peut produire des interfrences nuisibles aux communications radio. Cependant, il n'existe aucune garantie assurant qu'il n'y aura pas d'interfrence dans une installation particulire. Si l'utilisateur constate des interfrences lors de la rception d'missions de radio ou de tlvision (il suffit pour le vrifier d'allumer et d'teindre successivement l'appareil), il devra prendre l'une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes pour les liminer savoir :

Rorienter ou repositionner l'antenne de rception. Accrotre la distance entre le matriel et le rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique une prise d'un circuit autre que celui auquel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil un revendeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision expriment. Modifications La FCC requiert que l'utilisateur soit averti que toute modification de cet quipement non approuve expressment pas la socit Hewlett-Packard pourrait annuler le droit de l'utilisateur d'utiliser l'quipement. Cbles Les cbles branchs cet quipement doivent tre blinds et comporter des protections de connecteur mtalliques de type RFI/EMI pour tre conformes aux directives et rglementations de la FCC. 24 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Dclaration de conformit pour les produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) Ce matriel est conforme l'alina 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. Son fonctionnement est sous rserve des deux conditions suivantes :

1. Cet quipement ne doit pas causer d'interfrences nuisibles et 2. Cet quipement doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences capables de causer un mauvais fonctionnement. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de votre produit, crivez-nous l'adresse :

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Si vous avez des questions au sujet de la dclaration FCC, crivez-nous l'adresse :

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Ou appelez-nous au (281) 514-3333. Pour identifier ce produit, communiquez la rfrence ou le numro de srie ou de modle figurant sur le produit. Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de rseau local sans fil. Ce priphrique ne doit pas tre situ au mme endroit ou fonctionner en mme temps qu'une autre antenne ou un autre metteur. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition des missions de radiofrquence La puissance de sortie mise par ce priphrique est infrieure aux limites de la FCC sur l'exposition des missions de radiofrquence. Nanmoins, le priphrique doit tre utilis de faon ce que les risques de contact physique soient rduits pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'appareil. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter de dpasser les limites d'expositions aux frquences radio dictes dans la rglementation FCC, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 20 cm

(8 pouces) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. ATTENTION : Si vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, l'appareil ne doit tre utilis qu' l'intrieur d'un btiment, car il fonctionne dans une bande de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Il s'agit d'une rglementation de la FCC visant rduire le risque d'interfrences nuisibles aux systmes mobiles par satellite utilisant les mmes canaux. Les bandes de frquences allant de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz sont rserves aux stations radars trs puissantes. Celles-ci peuvent causer des interfrences et/ou endommager l'appareil. Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008. AVERTISSEMENT ! Modems without integral RJ-11 that are shipped with this computer must be installed only in devices displaying the A-tick. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 25 Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. ATTENTION : A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Si cet appareil dispose d'une fonctionnalit WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS pour les appareil exempts de licence d'Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est sous rserve des deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interfrences et

(2) cet appareil doit tolrer toute interfrence, notamment les interfrences pouvant engendrer un mauvais fonctionnement de l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio La puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter de dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 20 cm

(8 pouces) des antennes. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. ATTENTION : En cas d'utilisation d'un rseau LAN IEEE 802.11a, ce produit doit uniquement tre utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment, en raison de son fonctionnement sur la plage de frquence de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce produit soit utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment pour la plage de frquence allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz afin de rduire le risque d'interfrences prjudiciables pour les systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant le mme canal. Les plages de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz sont alloues prioritairement aux radars haute puissance. Ces stations radar peuvent provoquer des interfrences avec cet appareil ou l'endommager. L'antenne de cet appareil ne se remplace pas. Toute tentative de modification par l'utilisateur peut endommager l'ordinateur. Avis pour l'Union europenne Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant la marque CE sont conformes une ou plusieurs directives de l'UE suivantes, le cas chant :

Directive relative la basse tension 2006/95/CE Directive EMC 2004/108/CE Directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE Directive R&TTE 1999/5/CE Directive RoHS 2011/65/CE 26 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles La conformit CE de ce produit n'est valide que s'il est aliment par un adaptateur secteur estampill CE (le cas chant) et un cordon d'alimentation fournis par HP. Reportez-vous la section Cordons d'alimentation requis la page 39. La conformit ces directives implique la conformit aux normes europennes harmonises applicables (normes europennes) qui sont prsentes dans la dclaration de conformit de l'UE dicte par HP pour ce produit ou cette gamme de produits et disponibles soit dans la documentation du produit soit sur le site Web suivant : www.hp.eu/certificates (effectuez une recherche partir du nom de modle du produit ou de son numro de produit, accessible sur l'tiquette de conformit). La conformit est reprsente par la marque de conformit CE ci-aprs. Pour certains produits de tlcommunications, le numro 4 chiffres d'un organisme de certification peut tre ajout en suffixe. Reportez-vous l'tiquette de conformit appose sur le produit. La fonctionnalit de tlcommunications de ce produit peut tre utilise dans les pays de l'Union europenne et de l'AELE suivants : Allemagne, Autriche, Belgique, Bulgarie, Chypre, Danemark, Espagne, Estonie, Finlande, France, Grce, Hongrie, Irlande, Islande, Lettonie, Liechtenstein, Lituanie, Luxembourg, Malte, Norvge, Pays-Bas, Pologne, Portugal, Rpublique tchque, Roumanie, Royaume-Uni, Slovaquie, Slovnie, Sude et Suisse. Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, envoyez un courrier : Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Allemagne. Produits quips de modules sans fil CET APPAREIL EST CONFORME AUX NORMES INTERNATIONALES EN MATIRE D'EXPOSITION AUX RAYONNEMENTS DE FRQUENCE RADIO. Le module sans fil intgr votre ordinateur est un metteur et rcepteur radio. Cet appareil est conu pour ne pas dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dfinies par des directives internationales (ICNIRP). Ces limites sont dfinies dans le cadre de directives qui tablissent les niveaux autoriss de rayonnements de frquence radio pour l'ensemble de la population. Ces directives, dictes par des organismes scientifiques indpendants, s'appuient sur une valuation rgulire et minutieuse de diffrentes tudes scientifiques. Cet appareil est galement conforme aux directives R&TTE europennes relatives la protection de la sant et de la scurit des personnes. La norme d'exposition dfinie pour les appareils mobiles utilise une unit de mesure appele SAR

(Specific Absorption Rate, taux d'absorption spcifique).* Ce taux a t obtenu via des tests au cours desquels les appareils ont effectu des transmissions au niveau de puissance certifi le plus lev, dans toutes les bandes de frquence. Le taux SAR rel de l'appareil en cours de fonctionnement peut tre bien infrieur la valeur maximale dfinie, dans la mesure o il fonctionne diffrents niveaux de puissance et utilise uniquement la puissance requise pour atteindre le rseau. Install dans l'ordinateur, cet appareil est conforme aux directives en matire d'exposition aux frquences radio lorsque les antennes se trouvent une distance minimale du corps. Pour transmettre des donnes ou des messages, l'appareil doit disposer d'une connexion de qualit au rseau. Dans certains cas, les transmissions de donnes ou de messages peuvent tre retardes jusqu' ce qu'une connexion soit disponible. Veillez respecter la distance conseille jusqu' la fin de la transmission. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 27

*Les directives internationales autres que celles de la FCC indiquent que la limite SAR pour les appareils mobiles utiliss par le grand public est de 2 watts/kilogramme (W/kg), calcul sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de masse tissulaire. Ces directives incluent une marge de scurit importante pour une protection accrue du grand public et pour tenir compte des variations dans les mesures. Les valeurs SAR peuvent varier selon les exigences locales en matire de reporting et selon la bande du rseau. Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive 1999/5/CE (annexe II) sur les quipements hertziens et quipements terminaux de tlcommunications et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts

(RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. L'quipement a t conu pour fonctionner avec les rseaux DTMF analogiques. Cet quipement peut connatre des difficults d'interconnexion sur les rseaux RTPC prenant uniquement en charge la composition impulsions. Contactez votre oprateur rseau pour bnficier d'une aide supplmentaire. Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne (texte en franais) Un systme informatique compos de produits de marque HP est conforme aux exigences allemandes en matire d'ergonomie si tous les produits utiliss portent la marque d'homologation GS , par exemple l'ordinateur de bureau, le clavier, la souris et le moniteur. Allemagne (texte en allemand) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-Maus und Bildschirm. Avis pour le Japon B VCCI-B 28 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. Avis pour la Core du Sud Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 29 Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Si su producto se brinda con accesorios inalmbricos como un teclado o un mouse y necesita identificar el modelo del accesorio, consulte la etiqueta incluida en ese accesorio. Avis pour Tawan 30 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Notice d'avertissement relative la chaleur AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour viter tout risque de blessure associe la chaleur ou de surchauffe de l'ordinateur, ne placez pas ce dernier sur vos genoux et n'obstruez pas ses ouvertures d'aration. Utilisez toujours l'ordinateur sur une surface plane et rigide. La ventilation ne doit pas tre entrave par des lments rigides, tels qu'une imprimante, ni par des lments souples, tels que des coussins, du tissu ou un tapis pais. De mme, l'adaptateur secteur ne doit rester en contact ni avec la peau ni avec un lment souple, tel que des coussins, un vtement ou un tapis lorsque l'ordinateur est en cours de fonctionnement. L'ordinateur et l'adaptateur secteur sont conformes aux limites de temprature de surface accessible l'utilisateur, dfinies par la norme internationale sur la scurit du matriel informatique (CEI/EN 60950). Avis sur les risques lis la scurit Si vous observez l'une des situations suivantes (ou avez d'autres inquitudes en matire de scurit), n'utilisez pas l'ordinateur : bruit de crpitement, de sifflement ou de claquement ou forte odeur/fume en provenance de l'ordinateur. La survenue de l'une de ces situations est normale en cas de dfaillance d'un composant lectronique interne de manire neutralise et contrle. Cependant, ces situations peuvent galement indiquer un risque de scurit. Ne partez pas du principe qu'il s'agit d'une dfaillance neutralise. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension, dconnectez-le de sa source d'alimentation, puis contactez le support technique. Notice d'avertissement relative la chaleur 31 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur AVERTISSEMENT !

batterie d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie ou de brlures, abstenez-vous de dmonter, d'craser, de perforer, de jeter dans l'eau ou dans le feu une batterie, ou encore de court-circuiter ses connecteurs externes. AVERTISSEMENT ! Ne laissez pas les batteries la porte des enfants. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, n'utilisez que la batterie fournie avec l'ordinateur, une batterie de remplacement fournie par HP ou une batterie compatible achete comme accessoire auprs de HP. Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT ! L'coute prolonge de musique un volume lev peut endommager votre acuit auditive. Pour rduire le risque de diminution de l'acuit auditive, baissez le volume un niveau modr et agrable et minimisez le temps d'coute des volumes levs. Pour votre scurit, rinitialisez toujours le volume avant d'utiliser un casque ou des couteurs. Le volume sonore de certains de ces appareils peut tre plus lev que d'autres, mme si le rglage est identique. Toute modification des paramtres audio ou d'galisation par dfaut peut entraner une augmentation du volume et doit tre effectue avec prcaution. Pour votre scurit, utilisez uniquement des casques ou des couteurs respectant les limites dfinies par la norme EN 50332-2. Si l'ordinateur comporte un casque ou des couteurs, cette combinaison respecte la norme EN 50332-1. 32 Chapitre 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques d'lectrocution ou de dtrioration du matriel :

Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur facilement accessible. Coupez l'alimentation de l'ordinateur en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur

(plutt que de l'ordinateur). Si l'ordinateur portable est fourni avec une fiche tripolaire, branchez le cordon sur une prise lectrique tripolaire relie la terre. Ne dsactivez pas la broche de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation en utilisant, par exemple, un adaptateur bipolaire. La broche de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les problmes de scurit potentiels, n'utilisez avec cet ordinateur que l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'ordinateur, un adaptateur secteur de remplacement fourni par HP ou un adaptateur secteur achet comme accessoire auprs de HP. Nettoyage du clavier AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques d'lectrocution ou de dtrioration des composants internes, n'utilisez pas d'aspirateur pour nettoyer le clavier. Un aspirateur peut dposer de la poussire sur la surface du clavier. Nettoyez rgulirement le clavier pour viter que les touches ne deviennent collantes et pour liminer la poussire, les peluches et les particules qui risquent de se loger sous les touches. Utilisez une bombe dpoussirante air comprim avec embout directionnel permettant d'insuffler de l'air sous le clavier et autour des touches pour retirer les particules. Avis sur les dplacements AVERTISSEMENT ! Afin de rduire le risque de choc lectrique, d'incendie ou de dtrioration du matriel, n'essayez pas d'alimenter l'ordinateur au moyen d'un kit de conversion de tension destin aux quipements mnagers. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation 33 Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude 2000m ou 2000 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales Norvge et Sude : notice de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ATTENTION : Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, utilisez un isolant voltaque lors de la connexion un systme de distribution par cble. 34 Chapitre 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Informations importantes relatives la scurit AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Afin d'viter tout risque de choc lectrique ou de dommages votre quipement :

Ne dsactivez pas la prise de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation. La prise de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise mise la terre facilement accessible. Coupez l'alimentation du client lger en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur. L'ordinateur peut tre trs lourd ; assurez-vous d'adopter une position ergonomique adquate lors de sa manipulation. Installez l'ordinateur proximit d'une prise secteur. Le cordon d'alimentation secteur constitue le principal dispositif de dconnexion secteur de votre ordinateur et doit donc tre facilement accessible. Pour votre scurit, le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec votre ordinateur est quip d'une broche de mise la terre. Utilisez toujours le cordon d'alimentation avec une prise murale correctement relie la terre, afin de rduire les risques d'lectrocution. Pour rduire les risques de choc lectrique en provenance du rseau tlphonique, branchez votre ordinateur dans une prise secteur avant de le connecter une ligne tlphonique. Par ailleurs, dconnectez votre ligne tlphonique avant de dbrancher votre ordinateur de la prise secteur. Dbranchez le cordon du modem du rseau tlphonique avant d'installer ou d'enlever le capot de votre ordinateur. N'utilisez pas l'ordinateur lorsque le capot est enlev. Pour plus de scurit, dbranchez toujours l'ordinateur de sa source d'alimentation, de tout systme de tlcommunications (comme les lignes tlphoniques), des rseaux et des modems avant d'excuter toute opration de maintenance. Si vous ne respectez pas ces consignes, vous risquez de vous blesser ou de causer des dommages matriels. Le modem et l'alimentation de ce produit renferment des niveaux de tension dangereux. Informations importantes relatives la scurit 35 ATTENTION : Si votre ordinateur est quip d'un commutateur de slection de tension destin aux systmes fonctionnant sous 115 ou 230 V, ce commutateur a t prdfini sur la tension en vigueur dans le pays/rgion o il a t vendu initialement. Mettre le commutateur sur la mauvaise position peut endommager l'ordinateur et annuler toute garantie implicite. Ce produit n'a pas t valu pour une connexion un systme d'alimentation informatique (un systme de distribution de courant alternatif sans connexion directe la terre, selon la norme CEI/EN 60950). Conditions d'installation Consultez les instructions d'installation avant de brancher cet quipement l'alimentation. AVERTISSEMENT ! L'quipement doit tre pourvu d'un raccordement la terre protecteur secteur appropri. Cet ordinateur peut contenir des pices sous tension et amovibles. Dbranchez le cordon d'alimentation avant de retirer le botier. Remettez le botier bien en place avant de remettre l'ordinateur sous tension. Avis sur le remplacement de la batterie AVERTISSEMENT ! Le produit peut contenir une pile ou un module de batterie interne alcalin, au dioxyde de lithium manganse ou au pentoxyde de vanadium. Il y a danger d'incendie et de brlures s'il n'est pas manipul correctement. Pour rduire les risques de blessure :

N'essayez pas de recharger la batterie. vitez de la soumettre des tempratures suprieures 60 C (140 F). N'essayez pas de dmonter, d'craser, de percer la batterie, ni de court-circuiter ses bornes ou de la jeter dans le feu ou l'eau. Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une batterie d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. Remplacez uniquement par une batterie HP prvue pour ce produit. Pour plus d'informations sur le retrait d'une batterie, reportez-vous la documentation de l'ordinateur. Les piles, modules de batterie et accumulateurs ne doivent pas tre jets avec les ordures mnagres. Pour permettre leur recyclage ou leur mise au rebut, veuillez utiliser les systmes de collecte publique ou renvoyez-les HP, un partenaire HP agr ou leurs agents. Taiwan EPA demande aux fabricants ou aux importateurs de piles, conformment l'Article 15 de la loi relative la mise au rebut (Waste Disposal Act), d'indiquer les mentions de rcupration des piles usages dans des points de vente, brochures ou publicits. Contactez une entreprise de recyclage qualifie pour la mise au rebut approprie de la pile. 36 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur le volume des casques et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT ! L'coute prolonge de musique un volume lev peut endommager votre acuit auditive. Pour rduire le risque de diminution de l'acuit auditive, baissez le volume un niveau modr et agrable et minimisez le temps d'coute des volumes levs. Pour votre scurit, rinitialisez toujours le volume avant d'utiliser un casque ou des couteurs. Le volume sonore de certains de ces appareils peut tre plus lev que d'autres, mme si le rglage est identique. Toute modification des paramtres audio ou d'galisation par dfaut peut entraner une augmentation du volume et doit tre effectue avec prcaution. Si l'ordinateur est quip d'un casque d'coute ou d'couteurs et qu'il porte le sigle GS , cette combinaison est en conformit avec la norme EN 50332-1. Pour votre propre scurit, les casques d'coute ou les couteurs utiliss avec ces produits doivent tre en conformit avec les limitations des casques de la norme EN 50332-2. Informations de scurit relatives au laser Pour les produits quips d'units optiques ou d'metteurs fibre optique. Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de stockage optique (c'est--dire un lecteur CD ou DVD) et/ou d'un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Ces lments comportent des lasers classs dans la catgorie des produits laser de classe 1, conformment la norme IEC/EN 60825-1, et sont conformes ses exigences. Chacun de ces produits laser est conforme aux rgulations 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 de la US FDA ou est conforme ces normes l'exception des diffrences conformment la notice des lasers No. 50, du 24 Juin 2007. AVERTISSEMENT ! L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation des appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de pice rparable par l'utilisateur. N'effectuez pas de commandes, de rglages ou d'oprations sur l'appareil laser, autres que ceux indiqus dans le prsent manuel. Seuls les techniciens agrs HP sont autoriss rparer l'unit. Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 Pour tre protg contre les courants de dfaut, l'quipement doit tre raccord une borne de terre. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur disposant d'une mise la terre raccorde la terre. Les cordons d'alimentation de remplacement ne fournissent pas une protection adquate contre les dfauts. Utilisez exclusivement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit ou un cordon de remplacement agr par Hewlett-Packard. Avis sur le volume des casques et des couteurs 37 Danemark For tilslutning af de vrige ledere, se medflgende installationsvejledning. Finlande Laite on liitettv suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Norvge Apparatet m kun tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Sude Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag, nr den ansluts till ett ntverk. Exigences relatives l'alimentation Les alimentations sur certains produits sont quipes de commutateurs de tension externes. La fonction de slection de tension sur le produit autorise son fonctionnement sous toute tension comprise entre 100-127 ou 200-240 volts secteur. Les alimentations sur les produits dpourvus de commutateurs de tension externes sont quipes de circuits internes qui dtectent la tension d'entre et basculent automatiquement sur la tension approprie. Pour des raisons de scurit, n'utilisez que l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'quipement ou un adaptateur de remplacement autoris par Hewlett-Packard. Les rfrences de remplacement sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Pour une utilisation en Norvge Ce produit est galement conu pour un systme lectrique informatique avec tension phase-phase de 230 V. 38 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Cordons d'alimentation requis Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit est conforme aux rglementations en vigueur dans le pays o le matriel a t achet l'origine. N'utilisez que le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'quipement ou un cordon d'alimentation de remplacement de Hewlett-Packard ou d'une source HP agre. Les rfrences de remplacement sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/

hpsupport/index.pl. Les cordons d'alimentation destins tre utiliss dans d'autres pays doivent respecter les normes du pays o vous utilisez le produit. Pour plus d'informations sur les exigences de cordon d'alimentation, contactez votre revendeur, votre mainteneur ou votre fournisseur de services agr HP. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas de cordons d'alimentation d'autres produits. Un mauvais cordon d'alimentation peut entraner un risque de dcharge lectrique ou d'incendie. Les exigences prsentes ci-aprs s'appliquent tous les pays. 1. 2. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre homologu par une agence accrdite, responsable de l'valuation dans le pays o le cordon sera install. La longueur du cordon doit tre comprise entre 1,8 m (6 pieds) and 3,6 m (12 pieds). Pour un cordon d'alimentation de 2 m (6,56 pieds) ou moins, le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 0,75 mm2 ou 18 AWG. Si le cordon d'alimentation dpasse 2 m (6,56 pieds), le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 1 mm2 ou 16 AWG. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre branch un endroit dgag o il ne risque pas d'tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise murale et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier de l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas ce produit avec un cordon d'alimentation endommag. Si le cordon d'alimentation est endommag de quelque manire que ce soit, remplacez-le immdiatement. Un cordon endommag peut entraner des risques de blessure. Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon Pour une utilisation au Japon, utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'appareil. ATTENTION : N'utilisez pas le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit pour alimenter d'autres appareils. Risque de pincement AVERTISSEMENT ! Observez les zones risque de pincement. N'approchez pas vos doigts des pices se refermant. Risque de pincement 39 Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude 2000m ou 2000 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales 40 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne Le niveau de pression acoustique (LpA) est nettement en dessous de 70 dB(A) (position oprateur, fonctionnement normal, selon ISO 7779). Les donnes d'mission de bruit acoustique sont disponibles dans les dclarations IT ECO relatives au produit, l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne 41 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables Ce chapitre prsente des avis relatifs l'environnement des diffrents pays ou rgions et des informations de conformit. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-tre pas votre produit. Recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie HP encourage ses clients recycler l'quipement lectronique usag, les cartouches d'impression HP d'origine et les batteries rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site Web HP : http://www.hp.com/recycle. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/recycle. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits conformment aux dispositions lgales telles que REACH (rglement CE numro 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Un rapport d'informations sur la conformit des substances chimiques de ce produit est disponible l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/reach. 42 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

( http://www. sepa.gov.cn) Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) Tableau des substances/composants toxiques et dangereux et leur contenu conformment aux mthodes de gestion du contrle de la pollution par les produits d'informations lectroniques de Chine Substances et composants toxiques et dangereux Nom de la pice Plomb

(Pb) Mercure

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Batterie Cbles Camra Chssis/Autre Lecteur de carte mmoire flash Lecteur de disquette Disque dur Casque Cartes PCA d'entre/

sortie Clavier cran LCD X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chrome hexavalent

(Cr(VI)) Diphnyles polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine 43 Substances et composants toxiques et dangereux Nom de la pice Support (CD/DVD/

disquette) Mmoire Carte mre, processeur, dissipateurs thermiques Souris Unit de disque optique Priphrique d'amarrage en option Adaptateur d'alimentation Source d'alimentation Tlcommande Lecteur de carte Smart Card/Java Haut-parleurs externes Tuner TV Unit mmoire flash USB Concentrateur USB Webcam Rcepteur sans fil Cartes sans fil Plomb

(Pb) Mercure

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chrome hexavalent

(Cr(VI)) Diphnyles polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O : Indique que la quantit de substance toxique ou dangereuse contenue dans tous les matriaux homognes de cette pice se situe en dessous de la limite fixe par la norme SJ/T11363-2006. X : Indique que cette substance toxique ou dangereuse contenue dans au moins un matriel homogne utilis dans ce composant est au-dessus de la limite dans SJ/T11363-2006. Tous les lments du tableau accompagns d'un X sont conformes la directive europenne 2002/95/EC du 27 janvier 2003, dite RoHS (Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'environnement relative aux dchets d'quipements lectriques et lectroniques) et ses amendements. REMARQUE : La dure d'utilisation cologique en anne, en rfrence, a t dtermine sur la base de conditions normales d'utilisation du produit, telles que la temprature et l'humidit. 44 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables

/

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB) (PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T11363-2006 X SJ/T11363-2006 X RoHS 2003 1 27 2002/95/EC

:

Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) 45 Dclaration de contenu de l'quipement pour le Japon Une norme japonaise, dfinie par la spcification JIS C 0950, 2008, oblige les fabricants fournir des dclarations de contenu de matriel pour certaines catgories de produits lectroniques proposes la vente aprs le 1 juillet 2006. Pour afficher la dclaration de matriel JIS C 0950 de ce produit, rendez-vous sur le site Web HP : http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie Ce produit a t tiquet conformment la loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie exigeant la divulgation de la consommation nergtique en utilisation normale (mode inactif) et en mode veille. Votre produit correspond l'une des nombreuses configurations de cette famille de modle ; la consommation nergtique du mode inactif de votre configuration spcifique peut tre diffrente des informations figurant sur l'tiquette. La consommation nergtique relle de votre produit peut tre suprieure ou infrieure la valeur signale sur l'tiquette de l'nergie du produit au Mexique en raison de facteurs tels que la configuration (composants et modules choisis) et de l'utilisation (tches ralises, logiciels installs et excuts, etc.). Rglementation EEE de la Turquie En conformit avec la rglementation EEE EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine L'quipement est conforme aux exigences relatives aux rglementations techniques, approuves par la rsolution du Cabinet des ministres de l'Ukraine date du 3 dcembre 2008 1057, en termes de restrictions quant l'utilisation de certaines substances dangereuses dans les quipements lectroniques et lectriques.

, 3 2008 1057. Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire Voir http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel ou la pile bouton de ce produit est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. 46 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Recyclage du matriel lectronique et des batteries Hewlett-Packard encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, les cartouches d'impression de marque HP et les batteries rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour obtenir des informations concernant le recyclage du produit au Japon, reportez-vous http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/recycle. Conformit ENERGY STAR (certains modles) REMARQUE : Cette section s'applique uniquement aux produits portant le logo Energy Star. En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, Hewlett-Packard Company a suivi pour le produit le processus de qualification et de certification renforc labor de l'agence amricaine pour la protection de l'environnement afin de s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR sont agrs ENERGY STAR conformment aux lignes directrices d'ENERGY STAR en matire d'utilisation efficace de l'nergie. Le logo suivant est prsent sur tous les ordinateurs qualifis ENERGY STAR. Recyclage du matriel lectronique et des batteries 47 Le programme ENERGY STAR pour ordinateurs a t cr par l'EPA pour promouvoir l'conomie d'nergie et rduire la pollution de l'air grce des quipements plus conergtiques au sein des maisons, bureaux et usines. Une des faons de rendre les produits plus efficaces sur le plan nergtique consiste rduire la consommation lorsqu'elle n'est pas gre par la fonction Gestion de l'alimentation de Microsoft Windows. La fonction de gestion de l'alimentation permet la mise en veille de l'ordinateur aprs une priode d'inactivit de l'utilisateur. Lorsqu'elle est utilise avec un moniteur ENERGY STAR, cette fonction prend galement en charge les fonctions similaires de gestion de l'alimentation du moniteur externe. Afin de bnficier de cette conomie d'nergie, la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation a t prdfinie pour une mise en veille de l'ordinateur et du moniteur aprs une certaine priode d'inactivit :

Ordinateur Moniteur/cran intgr Ordinateurs de bureau et postes de travail Aprs 30 minutes Aprs 15 minutes Clients lgers et ordinateurs de bureau Sans objet Aprs 15 minutes Il suffit que l'utilisateur se serve d'un des priphriques d'entre de l'ordinateur (ex. : souris, clavier, etc.) pour que l'ordinateur et l'cran quittent le mode veille et se rallument. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN d'veil par appel rseau est active, il est galement possible de rallumer l'ordinateur l'aide d'un signal rseau. Pour plus d'informations sur le potentiel d'conomie nergtique et financire de la fonction Gestion de l'alimentation, reportez-vous au site Web consacr la gestion de l'alimentation ENERGY STAR de l'EPA : http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Pour plus d'informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses bienfaits sur l'environnement, reportez-vous au site Web ENERGY STAR de l'EPA : http://www.energystar.gov. ATTENTION : L'utilisation de la fonction d'conomie d'nergie du moniteur avec des moniteurs qui ne sont pas qualifis ENERGY STAR peut entraner une distorsion de l'image en cas de fermeture automatique pour conomie d'nergie. REMARQUE : ENERGY STAR n'est pas pris en charge sur les ordinateurs de bureau et les postes de travail configurs avec certaines versions de Linux ou FreeDOS. En cas de restauration du systme d'exploitation, vous devrez galement redfinir les paramtres ENERGY STAR (le cas chant) une fois la restauration effectue. Sous Windows 7, pour contrler les paramtres d'alimentation par dfaut de votre ordinateur de bureau ou station de travail, slectionnez Dmarrer > Panneau de configuration, puis tapez Options d'alimentation dans la fentre de recherche. 48 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Sous Windows 8, pour contrler les paramtres d'alimentation par dfaut de votre ordinateur de bureau ou station de travail, tapez alimentation dans l'cran d'accueil, slectionnez Paramtres, puis slectionnez Options d'alimentation dans la liste des applications. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits, conformment aux normes juridiques en vigueur telles que le rglement concernant l'enregistrement, l'valuation et l'autorisation des substances chimiques, ainsi que les restrictions applicables ces substances (REACH, rglement CE N 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ce produit sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Avis sur le mercure Ce produit HP peut contenir les matriaux suivants qui requirent un traitement spcial la fin de leur cycle de vie :

Le mercure contenu dans la lampe fluorescente de l'cran cristaux liquides (LCD) Il se peut que l'limination du mercure soit rglemente en raison de considrations environnementales. Pour obtenir des informations sur l'limination et le traitement de cette substance, veuillez contacter les autorits locales concernes ou l'Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. Reportez-

vous au site http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) Substances chimiques 49

(cid:7481)(cid:8706)(cid:7481)(cid:4579)(cid:10393)(cid:17240)(cid:2748)(cid:1907)(cid:13136)(cid:2554)(cid:1958)(cid:2651)(cid:18431)(cid:16024)

(cid:7785)(cid:6558)(cid:1117)(cid:3373)(cid:11444)(cid:457)(cid:11109)(cid:4480)(cid:1553)(cid:5791)(cid:1239)(cid:2801)(cid:8849)(cid:7683)(cid:6615)(cid:2150)(cid:12753)(cid:10806)(cid:2254)(cid:8965)(cid:458)

(cid:1137)(cid:7605)(cid:3)(cid:3898)(cid:10812)(cid:3230)(cid:2754)

(cid:7065)(cid:10019)(cid:3230)

(cid:1979)(cid:4494)(cid:7575) I/O PCAs

(cid:11115)(cid:9414)

(cid:19300)(cid:11534)

(cid:21846)(cid:7741)

(cid:7536)(cid:12775)(cid:18)(cid:1964)(cid:1292)

(cid:20228)(cid:6269)

(cid:1979)(cid:18206)(cid:18)(cid:3916)(cid:18206)(cid:4296)(cid:1417)

(cid:19515)(cid:16945)(cid:16884)(cid:3901)

(cid:3916)(cid:18206)(cid:6621)(cid:2156)(cid:16884)(cid:3901)

(cid:11115)(cid:13628)

(cid:11938)(cid:11534)(cid:20647)(cid:2270)(cid:3230)

(cid:7284)(cid:12144)(cid:4741) O: (cid:16030)(cid:12144)(cid:16923)(cid:7487)(cid:8712)(cid:7487)(cid:4585)(cid:10399)(cid:17246)(cid:3422)(cid:16923)(cid:18206)(cid:1324)(cid:6262)(cid:7487)(cid:3453)(cid:17246)(cid:7558)(cid:7119)(cid:1123)(cid:11450)(cid:2657)(cid:18437)(cid:3453)(cid:3422)SJ/T11363-2006(cid:3)

(cid:7741)(cid:2044)(cid:16378)(cid:4560)(cid:11450)(cid:19590)(cid:18437)(cid:16311)(cid:8824)(cid:1307)(cid:1089)(cid:574) X: (cid:16030)(cid:12144)(cid:16923)(cid:7487)(cid:8712)(cid:7487)(cid:4585)(cid:10399)(cid:17246)(cid:14377)(cid:4679)(cid:3422)(cid:16923)(cid:18206)(cid:1324)(cid:11450)(cid:7686)(cid:1078)(cid:3453)(cid:17246)(cid:7558)(cid:7119)(cid:1123)(cid:11450)(cid:2657)(cid:18437)(cid:17339)(cid:2096) SJ/T11363-2006(cid:3)(cid:7741)(cid:2044)(cid:16378)(cid:4560)(cid:11450)(cid:19590)(cid:18437)(cid:16311)(cid:8824)(cid:574)

(cid:16030)(cid:1123)(cid:7741)(cid:7487)(cid:263)X(cid:264)(cid:3)(cid:11450)(cid:6262)(cid:7487)(cid:18206)(cid:1324)(cid:18227)(cid:12636)(cid:2622)(cid:8541)(cid:11541)RoHS(cid:8971)(cid:16378)(cid:15)(cid:263)(cid:8541)(cid:9064)(cid:16868)(cid:1360)(cid:2754)(cid:8541)(cid:11541)(cid:10812)(cid:1217)(cid:1360) 2003(cid:5290)1(cid:7486)27(cid:7195)(cid:1961)(cid:1220)(cid:11115)(cid:4486)(cid:11115)(cid:3230)(cid:16884)(cid:3901)(cid:1123)(cid:19590)(cid:2156)(cid:1461)(cid:11102)(cid:7686)(cid:1233)(cid:7487)(cid:4585)(cid:10399)(cid:17246)(cid:11450)2002/95/EC

(cid:2605)(cid:6461)(cid:1306)(cid:264)(cid:574)

(cid:8990)(cid:966)(cid:10725)(cid:1555)(cid:1461)(cid:11102)(cid:7509)(cid:19590)(cid:11450)(cid:2552)(cid:13881)(cid:7741)(cid:16892)(cid:2572)(cid:2025)(cid:1220)(cid:1245)(cid:2807)(cid:8601)(cid:5230)(cid:5147)(cid:1426)(cid:11450)(cid:9311)(cid:5340)(cid:2754)(cid:9397)(cid:5340)(cid:12671)(cid:7575)(cid:1324)(cid:574) The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 50 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Tableau 6-1 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybromi-

nated biphenyls

(PBB) Polybromi-

nated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) Motherboard, processor and heat sink X Memory I/O PCAs Power supply Keyboard Mouse Chassis/Other Fans Internal/External Media Reading Devices External Control Devices Cable Hard Disk Drive Display X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. REMARQUE : The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. Dclarations IT ECO Ordinateurs de bureau et clients lgers http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Stations de travail http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Dclarations IT ECO 51 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie) Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal

(modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). REMARQUE : Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). REMARQUE : Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Rglementation EEE de la Turquie Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur 52 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles

(restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine)

, 3 2008 1057. The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

(restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine) 53 Index A avis utilisation en vol 12 voyage 33 avis sur la mise au rebut des quipements 42 avis, ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail avis sur la scurit des lasers 13 avis sur le niveau du volume, FCC (Federal Communications casque et couteurs 32 avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN de Thalande 11 batterie 12, 46 batterie, remplacement par l'utilisateur 32 Brsil 5 Canada 5 clavier 33 cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon 18 cordons d'alimentation 18, 33 Core du Sud 10 environnement 42 ergonomie 8, 28 Japon 9 Macrovision Corporation 19 matriau compos de perchlorate 46 Mexique 10 mise au rebut des quipements 42 modem 14 niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 32 restriction d'utilisation de Commission) 24 avis, ordinateurs portables FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 3 avis, restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine 43, 49 avis, restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour le Japon 52 avis de certification GS 8, 28 avis de restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 46 avis pour l'Union europenne 6, 26 avis pour la Core du Sud 10 avis pour le Brsil 5 avis pour le Canada 5 avis pour le Japon 9 avis pour Macrovision Corporation 19 substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 46 avis relatif au clavier 33 avis relatif aux appareils sans fil restriction d'utilisation de pour le Mexique 10 substances dangereuses pour la Chine 43, 49 avis sur l'altitude 34, 40 avis sur l'environnement pour la restriction d'utilisation de Chine 43 substances dangereuses pour le Japon 52 avis sur l'ergonomie 8, 28 avis sur la mise au rebut scurit des lasers 13 Singapour 11 Tawan 11 Union europenne 6, 26 batterie 46 batterie, remplacement par l'utilisateur 12 quipement 42 avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 32 avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour 11 avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN de Thalande 11 avis sur les conditions d'utilisation 42 avis sur les cordons d'alimentation 18, 33 avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon 18 avis sur les dplacements 33 avis sur les modems 14 Canada 17 Japon 17 Nouvelle-Zlande 17 systme amricain 14 avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande 17 avis sur les modems pour le avis sur les modems pour le Canada 17 Japon 17 avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis 14 avis sur les utilisations en vol 12 avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales 34, 40 avis tawanais 11 B batterie, avis 12, 32, 46 54 Index C conformit ENERGY STAR 12 D dclaration de conformit ordinateurs portables 4 dclaration de contenu de l'quipement pour le Japon 46 F FCC (Federal Communications Commission) avis sur les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 24 avis sur les ordinateurs portables 3 cble des ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 24 cbles pour ordinateurs portables 3 modifications apportes aux ordinateurs portables 3 modifications des ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 24 L loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie 46 M matriel lectronique et de la batterie, recyclage 42 modifications, ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 24 N notice de mise la terre des cbles 34 notices restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 53 O ordinateurs portables, modifications FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 3 P priphrique matriel, identification 1 priphriques de rseau local sans fil 25 priphriques LAN sans fil 26 priphriques WLAN 4 R recyclage de la batterie 42 recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie 42 restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 53 S support vocal 18 T tuner TV, notice de mise la terre des cbles 34 Index 55

Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This device meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.

*Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Note: The country code selection is for non-US model only and is not available to all US model. Per FCC regulation, all WiFi product marketed in US must fixed to US operation channels only. Industry Canada statement This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement."

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. Cet appareil est conforme la norme RSS-310 d'Industrie Canada. L'opration est soumise la condition que cet appareil ne provoque aucune interfrence nuisible. Radiation Exposure Statement:

The product comply with the Canada portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:

Le produit est conforme aux limites d'exposition pour les appareils portables RF pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Le produit est sr pour un fonctionnement tel que dcrit dans ce manuel. La rduction aux expositions RF peut tre augmente si l'appareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de l'utilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas tre situs ou fonctionner en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou un autre metteur, exception faites des radios intgres qui ont t testes. La fonction de slection de l'indicatif du pays est dsactive pour les produits commercialiss aux tats-Unis et au Canada.

- 1 Regulatory Information and Safety Guide 2 -

2013. All Rights Reserved. Regulatory Information and Safety Guide This revision: December 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of contents - 3 Tips and information for comfortable use 4 Finding your comfort zone .......................... 4 Taking care of your vision........................... 5 Developing good work habits...................... 6 Protecting your hearing............................... 6 Basic care and tips for using your computer 7 Turning your computer on and off............... 7 Taking care of your computer ..................... 7 General ....................................................... 8 Safety instructions ................................... 9 Product servicing ........................................ 9 Cleaning and servicing................................ 9 Battery and adapter information ............ 10 Accessing the power................................. 10 Disconnecting the power source............... 10 Using electrical power............................... 10 Guidelines for safe battery usage ............. 12 Warnings and regulatory information 14 Optical drives......................................... 14 Telephone line safety............................. 14 Emergency calls........................................ 15 Medical devices ..................................... 15 Vehicles ................................................. 16 Potentially explosive environments........ 16 Disposal instructions.............................. 17 ENERGY STAR ..................................... 17 Wireless equipment regulatory information................................................18 Radio frequency interference.................... 18 Use on aircraft........................................... 19 The wireless equipment and your health....19 USA FCC and FAA............................... 19 FCC radio frequency interference requirements............................................. 20 Canada Industry Canada (IC) .............. 22 European Union ........................................ 22 Compliant with Russian regulatory certification................................................ 28 4 - Tips and information for comfortable use TIPS AND INFORMATION FOR COMFORTABLE USE Important Some of the information in this guide may not apply to your computer. Computer users may complain of eyestrain and headaches after prolonged use. Users are also at risk of physical injury after long hours of working in front of a computer. Long work periods, bad posture, poor work habits, stress, inadequate working conditions, personal health and other factors greatly increase the risk of physical injury. Incorrect computer usage may lead to carpal tunnel syndrome, tendonitis, tenosynovitis or other musculoskeletal disorders. The following symptoms may appear in the hands, wrists, arms, shoulders, neck or back:

Numbness, or a burning or tingling sensation. Aching, soreness or tenderness. Pain, swelling or throbbing. Stiffness or tightness. Coldness or weakness. If you have these symptoms, or any other recurring or persistent discomfort and/or pain related to computer use, consult a physician immediately and inform your company's health and safety department. The following section provides tips for more comfortable computer use. Finding your comfort zone Find your comfort zone by adjusting the viewing angle of the monitor, using a footrest, or raising your sitting height to achieve maximum comfort. Observe the following tips:

Refrain from staying too long in one fixed posture. Tips and information for comfortable use - 5 Avoid slouching forward and/or leaning backward. Stand up and walk around regularly to remove the strain on your leg muscles. Take short rests to relax your neck and shoulders. Avoid tensing your muscles or shrugging your shoulders. Install the external display, keyboard and mouse properly and within comfortable reach. If you view your monitor more than your documents, place the display at the center of your desk to minimize neck strain. Taking care of your vision Long viewing hours, wearing incorrect glasses or contact lenses, glare, excessive room lighting, poorly focused screens, very small typefaces and low-contrast displays could stress your eyes. The following sections provide suggestions on how to reduce eyestrain. Eyes Rest your eyes frequently. Give your eyes regular breaks by looking away from the monitor and focusing on a distant point. Blink frequently to keep your eyes from drying out. Display Keep your display clean. Keep your head at a higher level than the top edge of the display so your eyes point downward when looking at the middle of the display. Adjust the display brightness and/or contrast to a comfortable level for enhanced text readability and graphics clarity. Eliminate glare and reflections by:

placing your display in such a way that the side faces the window or any light source, minimizing room light by using drapes, shades or blinds, using a task light, changing the display's viewing angle, using a glare-reduction filter, 6 - Tips and information for comfortable use using a display visor, such as a piece of cardboard extended from the display's top front edge. Avoid adjusting your display to an awkward viewing angle. Avoid looking at bright light sources for extended periods of time. Developing good work habits The following work habits make computer use more relaxing and productive:

Take short breaks regularly and often. Perform some stretching exercises. Breathe fresh air as often as possible. Exercise regularly and maintain a healthy body. Warning We do not recommend using the computer on a couch or bed. If this is unavoidable, work for only short periods, take breaks regularly, and do some stretching exercises. Protecting your hearing Warning Permanent hearing if earphones or headphones are used at high volume for prolonged periods of time. loss may occur To protect your hearing, follow these instructions. Increase the volume gradually until you can hear clearly and comfortably. Do not increase the volume level after your ears have adjusted. Do not listen to music at high volumes for extended periods. Do not increase the volume to block out noisy surroundings. Decrease the volume if you can't hear people speaking near you. BASIC CARE AND TIPS FOR USING YOUR COMPUTER Basic care and tips for using your computer - 7 Read these instructions carefully. Keep this document for future reference. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. Turning your computer on and off To turn on the computer, simply press and release the power button. Please refer to the setup poster for the location of the power button. To turn the power off, do any of the following:

Use the Windows shutdown command: Press the Windows key +

<C>, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down. If you need to power down the computer for a short while, but dont want to completely shut it down, you can put it into Hibernate by:

Pressing the power button. You can also put the computer in sleep mode by pressing the sleep hotkey <Fn> + <F4>. Note If you cannot power off the computer normally, press and hold the power button for more than four seconds to shut down the computer. If you turn off the computer and want to turn it on again, wait at least two seconds before powering up. Taking care of your computer Your computer will serve you well if you take care of it. Do not expose the computer to direct sunlight. Do not place it near sources of heat, such as a radiator. Do not expose the computer to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 50 C (122 F). Do not subject the computer to magnetic fields. Do not expose the computer to rain or moisture. Do not spill water or any liquid on the computer. 8 - Basic care and tips for using your computer Do not subject the computer to heavy shock or vibration. Do not expose the computer to dust or dirt. Never place objects on top of the computer. Do not slam the computer display when you close it. Never place the computer on uneven surfaces. General Do not use this product near water. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. If the product falls, it could be seriously damaged. Slots and openings are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register, or in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided. Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the product. To avoid damage of internal components and to prevent battery leakage, do not place the product on a vibrating surface. Never use it under sporting, exercising, or any vibrating environment which will probably cause a short-circuit or damage rotor devices, HDD, optical drive, and even exposure risk from the lithium battery pack. The bottom surface, areas around ventilation openings and AC adapter may get hot. To avoid injury, ensure they do not come in contact with your skin or body. Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. The surface temperature of the base will rise during normal operation, particularly when plugged in to AC power. Allowing sustained contact with exposed skin can cause discomfort or burns. Basic care and tips for using your computer - 9 Safety instructions Product servicing Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points or other risks. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel when:

The power cord or plug is damaged, cut or frayed. Liquid was spilled into the product. The product was exposed to rain or water. The product has been dropped or the case has been damaged. The product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. The product does not operate normally after following the operating instructions. The product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. The product does not operate normally after following the operating instructions. Note Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, since improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal condition. Cleaning and servicing When cleaning the computer, follow these steps:

1.Turn off the computer and remove the battery pack. 2.Disconnect the AC adapter. 3.Use a soft, moist cloth. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. 10 - Basic care and tips for using your computer Battery and adapter information Accessing the power Be sure that the power outlet you plug into is easily accessible and located as close to the equipment operator as possible. When you need to disconnect power to the equipment, be sure to unplug from the electrical outlet. Disconnecting the power source Observe the following guidelines when connecting and disconnecting power to the power supply unit:

Install the power supply unit before connecting to the AC power outlet. Unplug before removing the power supply unit from the computer. If the system has multiple sources of power, disconnect power from the system by unplugging all power cords from the power supplies. Using electrical power Do not connect the adapter to any other device. When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord itself but pull on the plug. This product should be operated from the type of power indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available, consult your dealer or local power company. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where people will walk on the cord. If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere rating of the equipment plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total rating of all products plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the fuse rating. Do not overload a power outlet, strip or receptacle by plugging in too many devices. The overall system load must not exceed 80% of the branch circuit rating. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed 80% of the power strip's input rating. Basic care and tips for using your computer - 11 If this product's AC adapter is equipped with a three-wire grounded plug. The plug only fits in a grounded power outlet. Make sure the power outlet is properly grounded before inserting the AC adapter plug. Do not insert the plug into a non-grounded power outlet. Contact your electrician for details. Warning The grounding pin is a safety feature. Using a power outlet that is not properly grounded may result in electric shock and/or injury. Note The grounding pin also provides good protection from unexpected noise produced by other nearby electrical devices that may interfere with the performance of this product. The system can be powered using a wide range of voltages; 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 V or 100-240 V AC. The power cord included with the system meets the requirements for use in the country/region where the system was purchased. Power cords for use in other countries/regions must meet the requirements for that country/

region. For more information on power cord requirements, contact an authorized reseller or service provider. 12 - Basic care and tips for using your computer Guidelines for safe battery usage Warning Batteries may explode if not handled properly. Do not disassemble or dispose of them in fire. Do not tamper with batteries. Keep them away from children. Follow local regulations when disposing of used batteries. Important Replace the battery with the same type as that which came bundled with your product. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. This notebook uses a Lithium battery. Do not use it in a humid, wet or corrosive environment. Do not put, store or leave your product in or near a heat source, in a high temperature location, in strong direct sunlight, in a microwave oven or in a pressurized container, and do not expose it to temperatures over 60 C (140 F). Failure to follow these guidelines may cause the battery to leak acid, become hot, explode or ignite and cause injury and/or damage. Do not pierce, open or disassemble the battery. If the battery leaks and you come into contact with the leaked fluids, rinse thoroughly with water and seek medical attention immediately. For safety reasons, and to prolong the lifetime of the battery, charging will not occur at temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 40 C (104 F). The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the operation time becomes noticeably shorter than normal, buy a new battery. Use only the approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with the approved chargers designated for this device. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in Basic care and tips for using your computer - 13 your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. The capacity and lifetime of the battery will be reduced if the battery is left in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter. Always try to keep the battery between 15 C and 25 C (59 F and 77 F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is especially limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Wireless devices may be susceptible to interference from the battery, which could affect performance. Note Please refer to www.acer.com for battery shipping documents. 14 - Warnings and regulatory information WARNINGS AND REGULATORY INFORMATION Optical drives CAUTION: This appliance contains a laser system and is classified as a "CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT." In case of any trouble with this device, please contact your nearest AUTHORIZED service station. To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the enclosure. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CAUTION: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1 PRODUIT LASERATTENTION: RADIATION DU FAISCEAU LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS DOUVERTURE. EVITTER TOUTE EXPOSITION AUX RAYONS. LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE LASER KLASSE 1 VORSICHT:

ABDECKUNG GEFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHLL AUSSETZEN PRODUCTO LSER DE LA CLASE I ADVERTENCIA: RADIACIN LSER INVISIBLE AL SER ABIERTO. EVITE EXPONERSE A LOS RAYOS. ADVARSEL: LASERSTRLING VEDBNING SE STRLEN. VARO! LAVATTAESSA OLET ALTTINA LASERSTEILYLLE. VARNING: LASERSTRLNING NR DENNA DEL R PPNAD L TUIJOTA STEESEENSTIRRA EJ IN I STRLEN VARNING:

PPNADSTIRRA EJ IN I STRLEN ADVARSEL: LASERSTRLING NAR DEKSEL PNESSTIRR IKKE INN I STRLEN LASERSTRLNING NAR DENNA DEL LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN UNSICHTBARE IKKE IND R I Telephone line safety Warnings and regulatory information - 15 Disconnect all telephone lines from the equipment when not in use and/or before servicing. To avoid the remote risk of electric shock from lightning, do not connect the telephone line to this equipment during lightning or thunderstorms. Emergency calls Warning You cannot make emergency calls through this device. To make an emergency call you shall dial out through your mobile phone or other telephone call system. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF transmissions. Pacemakers. Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) be maintained between wireless devices and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should do the following:

Always keep the device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from research by and the pacemaker Not carry the device near your pacemaker when the device is switched on. If you suspect interference, switch off your device, and move it. Hearing aids. Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. 16 - Warnings and regulatory information Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed, and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Warning Do not operate a portable transmitter (including this wireless equipment) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the transmitter has been modified to be qualified for such use. Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Warnings and regulatory information - 17 Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas

(such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Do not switch the notebook on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Disposal instructions Do not throw this electronic device into the trash when discarding. To minimize pollution and ensure utmost protection of the global environment, please recycle. For more from Electrical and Electronics Equipment (WEEE) regulations, visit www.acer-group.com/public/Sustainability information on the Waste ENERGY STAR Acer's ENERGY STAR qualified products save your money by reducing energy cost and protecting the environment without sacrificing features or performance. Acer is proud to offer our customers products with the ENERGY STAR mark. What is ENERGY STAR?

Products that are ENERGY STAR qualified use less energy and prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency guidelines set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Acer is committed to offering products and services worldwide that help customers save money, conserve energy and improve the quality of our environment. The more energy we can save through higher energy efficiency, the more we reduce greenhouse gases and the risks to www.energystar.gov or www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. change. More information climate refers of 18 - Warnings and regulatory information Note Information in this section may not apply to your computer. Acer ENERGY STAR qualified products:

Produce less heat and reduce cooling loads, and warmer climates. Automatically go into "display sleep" and "computer sleep" mode after 10 and 30 minutes of inactivity respectively. Wake the computer from sleep mode by pushing keyboard or moving mouse. Computers will save more than 80% energy at "sleep" mode. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks Wireless equipment regulatory information Radio frequency interference Warning For safety reasons, turn off all wireless or radio transmitting devices when using your laptop under the following conditions. These devices may include, but are not limited to: wireless LAN (WLAN), Bluetooth and/or 3G. Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used normally. To successfully transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device, and persons with hearing aids should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Warnings and regulatory information - 19 Use on aircraft Warning FCC and FAA regulations may prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices (wireless equipment) because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Ask the cabin crew before turning on your devices wireless equipment whilst on board. The wireless equipment and your health The wireless equipment, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by the wireless equipment, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The wireless equipment operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards These standards recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the wireless equipment may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations may include:

recommendations. and and Using the wireless equipment on board airplanes, or Using the wireless equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless equipment in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for authorization to use the adapter before you turn it on. you are encouraged for example), to ask USA FCC and FAA for human exposure The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard

(RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The wireless equipment meets found in OET Bulletin 65, the Human Exposure frequency limits radio to 20 - Warnings and regulatory information supplement C, 2001, and ANSI/IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:

Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; this behavior may cause damage to the radio. The use of wireless equipment in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. The use of wireless equipment on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). The use of wireless equipment in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. The product comply with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable this wireless equipment) near unshielded blastingcaps or in an explosive environment unless the transmitter has been modified to be qualified for such use. transmitter (including FCC radio frequency interference requirements Note Applies to device supporting IEEE 802.11a wireless equipments. Warnings and regulatory information - 21 This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz and 5.470 to 5.725 GHz frequency ranges. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency ranges 5.15 to 5.25 GHz and 5.470 to 5.725 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and this device. No configuration controls are provided this wireless equipment allowing any change frequency of operations outside the FCC grant of authorization for U.S operation according to Part 15.407 of the FCC rules.

/or damage for the in USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Radiation Exposure Statement:

The product comply with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Interference statement This wireless equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This wireless equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the wireless equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the wireless equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular this wireless equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:

installation. If 22 - Warnings and regulatory information Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna of the equipment experiencing the interference. Increase the distance between the wireless equipment and the equipment experiencing the interference. Connect the computer with the wireless equipment to an outlet the equipment on a circuit different experiencing the interference is connected. to which from that Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. European Union List of applicable countries This product must be used in strict accordance with the regulations and constraints in the country of use. For further information, contact the local office in the country of use. Please see http://ec.europa.eu/

enterprise/rtte/implem.htm for the latest country list. List of national codes This equipment may be operated in the following countries:

Country Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia ISO 3166 2 letter code Country AT BE CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IE IT LV Malta Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Switzerland Bulgaria ISO 3166 2 letter code MT NL PL PT SK SI ES SE GB IS LI NO CH BG Country Lithuania Luxembourg ISO 3166 2 letter code Country LT Romania Turkey LU ISO 3166 2 letter code RO TR Specific absorption rate information This device meets the EU requirements on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields by way of health protection. The limits are part of extensive recommendations for the protection of the general public. These recommendations have been developed and checked by independent scientific organizations through regular and thorough evaluations of scientific studies. The unit of measurement for the European Council's recommended limit for mobile devices is the "Specific Absorption Rate" (SAR), and the SAR limit is 2.0 W/kg averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. It meets the requirements of International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). For body worn operation, this device has been tested and meets the ICNIRP exposure guidelines and the European Standard, for use with dedicated accessories. Use of other accessories which contain metals may not ensure compliance with ICNIRP exposure guidelines. The low band 5.15 to 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. See Statements of European Union Compliance, and more details refer to the attached Declaration of Conformity. the English esky

[Czech]

Daansk

[Danish]

Hereby, ACER INC., declares that this devise is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisionns of Directive 1999/5/EC. ACER INC. tmto prohlauje, e toto zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES. Undertegnede ACER INC. erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. 24 - Warnings and regulatory information Deutsch

[German]

Eesti

[Estonian]

Espaol

[Spanish]

[Greek]

Franais

[French]

slenska

[Icelandic]

Italiano

[Italian]

Latviski

[Latvian]

Lietuvi

[Lithuanian]

Hiermit erklrt ACER INC., dass sich das Gert Radiolan in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab ACER INC. seadme vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Por medio de la presente ACER INC. declara que el dispositivo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. ACER INC. 1999/5/ . Par la prsente ACER INC. dclare que cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/

CE. Hr me lsir ACER INC. yfir v a er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar krfur, sem gera r eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Con la presente ACER INC. dichiara che questo dispositivo conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o ACER INC. deklar, ka ierce atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. iuo ACER INC. deklaruoja, kad is renginys atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Warnings and regulatory information - 25 Malti

[Maltese]

Magyar

[Hungarian]

Nederlands

[Dutch]

Norsk

[Norwegiann]

Polski

[Polish]

Portugus

[Portuguese]

Slovensko

[Slovenian]

Slovensky

[Slovak]

Suomi

[Finnish]

Svenska

[Swedish]

Hawnhekk, ACER INC., jiddikjara li dan jikkonforma mal- ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti o rajn relevanti li he mm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Alulrott, ACER INC. nyilatkozom, hogy a kszlk megfelel a vonatkoz alapveto kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elorsainak. Hierbij verklaart ACER INC. dat het toestel voldoet aan de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. ACER INC. erklrer herved at utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Niniejszym ACER INC. owiadcza, e urzdzenie jest zgodne z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. ACER INC. declara que este dispostivo est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. ACER INC. izjavlja, da je ta naprava skladna z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili Direktive 1999/5/ES. ACER INC. tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenie spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. ACER INC. vakuuttaa tten ett tm laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevienn direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar ACER INC. att denna enhet str i verensstmmelse med vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. 26 - Warnings and regulatory information France Pour la France mtropolitaine :

2,400 - 2,4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2,400 - 2,454 GHz (canaux 1 7) autoris en usage extrieur Pour la Guyane et la Runion :

2,400 - 2,4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2,420 - 2,4835 GHz (canaux 5 13) autoris en usage extrieur Pour tout le territoire Franais :

Seulement 5,15 -5,35 GHz autoris pour le 802.11a L'utilisation de cet equipement (2,4 GHz WLAN) est soumise certaines restrictions :

La puissance maximale autorise en intrieur est de 100 mW pour 2400 - 2483,5 MHz. La puissance maximale autorise est de 100 mW en extrieur pour 2400 - 2454 MHz. La puissance maximale autorise est de 10 mW en extrieur, 2454 -

2483,5 MHz. Pour les dernires restrictions, voir www.art-telecom.fr. Italy The use of this equipment is regulated by:

1.D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, article 104 (activity subject to general authorization) for outdoor use and article 105 (free use) for indoor use, in both cases for private use. 2.D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. Luso degli apparati regolamentato da:

1.D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, articoli 104 (attivit soggette ad autorizzazione generale) se utilizzati al di fuori del proprio fondo e 105 (libero uso) se utilizzati entro il proprio fondo, in entrambi i casi per uso private. 2.D.M. 28.5.03, per la fornitura al pubblico dellaccesso R-LAN alle reti e ai servizi di telecomunicazioni. Warnings and regulatory information - 27 Belgium Dans le cas d'une utilisation prive, l'extrieur d'un btiment, au-

dessus d'un espace public, aucun enregistrement n'est ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300 m. Pour une distance suprieure 300 m un enregistrement auprs de l'IBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter l'IBPT. In geval van priv-gebruik, buiten een gebouw, op een openbare plaats, is geen registratie nodig, wanneer de afstand minder dan 300 m is. Voor een afstand groter dan 300 m is een registratie bij BIPT vereist. Voor registraties en te contacteren. licenties, gelieve BIPT Brazil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Pakistan Pakistan Telecommunication Authority (PTA) Approved. Morocco The operation of this product in the radio channel 2 (2417 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Agadir, Assa-Zag, Cabo Negro, Chaouen, Goulmima, Oujda, Tan Tan, Taourirt, Taroudant and Taza. The operation of this product in the radio channels 4, 5, 6 and 7 (2425

- 2442 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Aroport Mohamed V, Agadir, Aguelmous, Anza, Benslimane, Bni Hafida, Cabo Negro, Casablanca, Fs, Lakbab, Marrakech, Merchich, Mohammdia, Rabat, Sal, Tanger, Tan Tan, Taounate, Tit Mellil, Zag. Japan 5 GHz Korea 28 - Warnings and regulatory information Taiwan

;

Modifications to the product Acer cannot be held responsible for unauthorized modifications made by the user and the consequences thereof, which may alter the conformity of the product. Compliant with Russian regulatory certification Warnings and regulatory information --29 Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Cet appareil se conforme RSS210 de Canada d'Industrie. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Ce dispositif est conforme a la norme CNR-210 d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prejudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage recu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indesirable.

(Notice for 5GHz) Caution :

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and

(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.

(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users

(i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Avertissement:

Le guide dutilisation des dispositifs pour rseaux locaux doit inclure des instructions prcises sur les restrictions susmentionnes, notamment :

(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5 150-5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;

(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5 725-5 825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas.

(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radiation Exposure Statement:

The product comply with the Canada portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 30 - Warnings and regulatory information This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

"To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."

Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afin de fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102):

The computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's Web site at http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/

The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless adapters conforms to the IC limit of the RF exposure requirement regarding IC RSS-102, Issue 4 clause 4.1. SAR tests are conducted using recommended operating positions accepted by the FCC/RSS with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency band without distance attaching away from the body. Non-compliance with the above restrictions may result in violation of FCC RF exposure guidelines. Conformit des appareils de radiocommunication aux limites d'exposition humaine aux radiofrquences (CNR-102):

L'ordinateur utilise des antennes intgrales faible gain qui n'mettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par Sant Canada pour la population. Consultez le Code de scurit 6 sur le site Internet de Sant Canada l'adresse suivante : http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/

L'nergie mise par les antennes relies aux cartes sans fil respecte la limite d'exposition aux radiofrquences telle que dfinie par Industrie Canada dans la clause 4.1 du document CNR-102, version 4. Tests DAS sont effectus en utilisant les positions recommandes par la FCC/CNR avec le tlphone met la puissance certifie maximale dans toutes les bandes de frquences testes sans distance attacher loin du corps. Non-respect des restrictions ci-dessus peut entraner une violation des directives de la FCC/CNR.

- 1 Users Manual 2 -

2014. All Rights Reserved. Aspire R 14 Covers: R3-471TG / R3-471T / R3-431TG / R3-431T This revision: July 2014 Sign up for an Acer ID and enjoy great benefits Open the Acer Portal app from the Start screen to sign up for an Acer ID or sign in if you already have an Acer ID. There are three great reasons for you to get an Acer ID:

Build Your Own Cloud with Acer BYOC. Get the latest offers and product information. Register your device for warranty service. For more information, please visit the AcerCloud website:

www.acer.com/byoc-start Important This manual contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright laws. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Images provided herein are for reference only and may contain information or features that do not apply to your computer. Acer Group shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained in this manual. Model number: _________________________________ Serial number: _________________________________ Date of purchase: ______________________________ Place of purchase: ______________________________ TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of contents - 3 2 First things first Your guides ............................................. 2 Basic care and tips for using your computer.................................................. 2 Turning your computer off........................... 2 Taking care of your computer ..................... 3 Taking care of your AC adapter.................. 3 Cleaning and servicing................................ 4 Your Acer notebook tour 5 Screen view............................................. 5 Keyboard view ...................................... 6 Front view ............................................... 7 Left view ................................................. 7 Information on USB 3.0............................... 8 Right view ............................................... 8 Base view ................................................ 9 Using the keyboard 10 Lock keys and embedded numeric keypad................................................... 10 Hotkeys..................................................... 11 Windows keys........................................ 12 Touchpad 13 Touchpad basics ................................... 13 Touchpad gestures................................ 13 Recovery 15 Creating a recovery backup................... 15 Creating a drivers and applications backup................................................... 17 Recovering your system ........................ 19 Reinstalling drivers and applications......... 20 Returning to an earlier system snapshot .. 22 Returning your system to its factory condition.................................................... 23 Recovering from Windows ........................ 23 Recovering from a recovery backup ......... 26 Connecting to the Internet 29 Connecting with a cable ........................ 29 Built-in network feature ............................. 29 Connecting wirelessly............................ 30 Connecting to a wireless LAN................... 30

.................................................................. 30 Using a Bluetooth connection 31 Enabling and disabling Bluetooth .......... 31 Enable Bluetooth and add a device .......... 31 Acer Touch Tools 33 Touch tool controls ................................ 33 Pointing ..................................................... 34 Using AccuFinger...................................... 34 RepliView.................................................. 35 Settings..................................................... 35 Acer Screen Grasp 37 Overview .............................................. 37 Adjusting the Settings ............................... 38 The editing tool ......................................... 38 40 Acer Scrapboard 41 Acer Backup Manager Contact pickup 43 Sending your contact information .......... 43 BIOS utility 2 Boot sequence......................................... 2 Setting passwords ................................... 2 Securing your computer 3 Using a computer security lock................ 3 Using passwords ..................................... 3 Entering passwords .................................... 4 Power management 5 Saving power ........................................... 5 Battery pack 7 Battery characteristics ............................. 7 Charging the battery ................................... 7 Optimizing battery life ................................. 8 Checking the battery level........................... 9 Battery-low warning .................................... 9 Traveling with your computer 10 Disconnecting from the desktop ............ 10 Moving around....................................... 10 Preparing the computer ............................ 10 What to bring to meetings......................... 11 Taking the computer home .................... 11 Preparing the computer ............................ 11 What to take with you................................ 12 Special considerations.............................. 12 Setting up a home office ........................... 12 Traveling with the computer................... 12 Preparing the computer ............................ 13 What to take with you................................ 13 Special considerations.............................. 13 Traveling internationally......................... 13 Preparing the computer ............................ 13 What to bring with you .............................. 14 Special considerations.............................. 14 Memory card reader 2 Connectivity options................................. 2 4 - Table of contents Video and audio connectors 4 HDMI 5 Universal Serial Bus (USB) 6 Frequently asked questions 2 Requesting service.................................. 4 Tips and hints for using Windows 8.1...... 5 How do I get to Start? ................................. 5 What are "Charms?" ................................... 5 Can I boot directly to the desktop? ............. 6 How do I jump between apps?.................... 6 How do I turn off my computer?.................. 6 How do I unlock my computer?................... 6 How do I set the alarm?.............................. 8 Where are my apps?................................... 9 What is a Microsoft ID (account)?............. 11 How do I add a favorite to Internet Explorer?................................................... 11 How do I check for Windows updates?..... 11 Where can I get more information?........... 11 Troubleshooting..................................... 12 Troubleshooting tips.................................. 12 Error messages......................................... 12 Internet and online security 14 First steps on the net ............................. 14 Protecting your computer.......................... 14 Choose an Internet Service Provider........ 14 Network connections................................. 16 Surf the Net!.............................................. 18 Security..................................................... 18

- 1 Getting started... In this section you will find:

Useful information on caring for your computer and your health Where to find the power button, ports and connectors Tips and tricks for using the touchpad and keyboard How to create recovery backups Guidelines for connecting to a network and using Bluetooth Information on using Acers bundled software 2 - First things first FIRST THINGS FIRST We would like to thank you for making this Acer notebook your choice for meeting your mobile computing needs. Your guides To help you use your Acer notebook, we have designed a set of guides:

First off, the Setup Guide helps you get started with setting up your computer. The Quick Guide introduces you to the basic features and functions of your new computer. For more on how your computer can help you to be more productive, please refer to the Users Manual. This guide contains detailed information on such subjects as system utilities, data recovery, expansion options and troubleshooting. In addition it contains general regulations and safety notices for your notebook. It is available from the desktop; double-click the Help icon and click Users Manual in the menu that opens. Basic care and tips for using your computer Turning your computer off To turn the power off, do any of the following:

Use the Windows shutdown command: Press the Windows key +

<C>, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down. If you need to power down the computer for a short while, but dont want to completely shut it down, you can put it into Hibernate by pressing the power button. First things first - 3 You can also put the computer in sleep mode by pressing the sleep hotkey <Fn> + <F4>. Note If you cannot power off the computer normally, press and hold the power button for more than four seconds to shut down the computer. If you turn off the computer and want to turn it on again, wait at least two seconds before powering up. Taking care of your computer Your computer will serve you well if you take care of it. Do not expose the computer to direct sunlight. Do not place it near sources of heat, such as a radiator. Do not expose the computer to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 50 C (122 F). Do not subject the computer to magnetic fields. Do not expose the computer to rain or moisture. Do not spill water or any liquid on the computer. Do not subject the computer to heavy shock or vibration. Do not expose the computer to dust or dirt. Never place objects on top of the computer. Do not slam the computer display when you close it. Never place the computer on uneven surfaces. Taking care of your AC adapter Here are some ways to take care of your AC adapter:

Do not connect the adapter to any other device. Do not step on the power cord or place heavy objects on top of it. Carefully route the power cord and any cables away from foot traffic. When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord itself but pull on the plug. The total ampere ratings of the equipment plugged in should not exceed the ampere rating of the cord if you are using an extension cord. Also, the total current rating of all equipment plugged into a 4 - First things first single wall outlet should not exceed the fuse rating. Cleaning and servicing When cleaning the computer, follow these steps:

1.Turn off the computer. 2.Disconnect the AC adapter. 3.Use a soft, moist cloth. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. If either of the following occurs:

The computer has been dropped or the body has been damaged;

The computer does not operate normally See Frequently asked questions on page 2. YOUR ACER NOTEBOOK TOUR Your Acer notebook tour - 5 After setting up your computer as illustrated in the Setup Guide, let us show you around your new Acer computer. Screen view 1 2 3

#

1 2 3 Icon Item Webcam Touchscreen Microphone Description Web camera for video communication. A light next to the webcam indicates that the webcam is active. Displays computer output, supports multi-touch input. Internal stereo microphone for sound recording. 6 - Your Acer notebook tour Keyboard view 1 2 Icon Item Keyboard Touchpad

#

1 2 Description For entering data into your computer. See "Using the keyboard" on page 10. Do not use a keyboard protector or similar cover as the keyboard includes ventilation intakes for cooling. Touch-sensitive pointing device. The touchpad and selection buttons form a single surface. Press down firmly on the touchpad surface to perform a left click. Press down firmly on the lower right corner to perform a right click. Front view 1

# Icon Item Power indicator 1 Battery indicator Left view Your Acer notebook tour - 7 Description Indicates the computers power status. Indicates battery status. Charging: The light is amber when the battery is charging. Fully charged: The light is blue. 1 2 3 4 5

#

Icon Item Kensington lock slot 1 2 Ventilation Description Connects to a Kensington-

compatible computer security lock. Wrap the computer security lock cable around an immovable object such as a table or handle of a locked drawer. Insert the lock into the notch and turn the key to secure the lock. Keyless models are also available. Allows the computer to stay cool. Do not cover or obstruct the openings. 8 - Your Acer notebook tour Icon

#

3 4 Item Ethernet (RJ-45) port HDMI port 5 USB port Information on USB 3.0 Description Connects to an Ethernety 10/100/

1000-based network. Supports high-definition digital video connections. Connects to USB devices. USB 3.0 compatible ports are blue. Compatible with USB 3.0 and earlier devices. For optimal performance, use USB 3.0-certified devices. Defined by the USB 3.0 specification (SuperSpeed USB). Right view 1 2 3 4 5

# Icon 1 2 3 4 5 Item Headset/speaker jack SD card reader USB ports Power button Description Connects to audio devices (e.g., speakers, headphones) or a headset with microphone. Accepts one Secure Digital card (SD or SDHC). Push to remove/install the card. Only one card can operate at any given time. Connects to USB devices. Turns the computer on and off. DC-in jack Connects to an AC adapter. Your Acer notebook tour - 9 3 Base view 1 2

# Icon Item 1 2 3 Battery reset pinhole Speakers Ventilation and cooling fan Description Simulates removing and reinstalling the battery. Insert a paperclip into the hole and press for four seconds. Deliver stereo audio output. Allows the computer to stay cool. Do not cover or obstruct the openings. 10 - Using the keyboard USING THE KEYBOARD The keyboard has full-sized keys and an embedded numeric keypad, separate cursor, lock, Windows, function and special keys. Lock keys and embedded numeric keypad The keyboard has three lock keys which you can toggle on and off. Lock key Caps Lock Description When Caps Lock is on, all alphabetic characters typed are in uppercase. When Num Lock is on, the embedded keypad is in numeric mode. The keys function as a calculator

(complete with the arithmetic operators +, -, *, and /). Use this mode when you need to do a lot of numeric data entry. A better solution would be to connect an external keypad. When Scroll Lock is on, the screen moves one line up or down when you press the up or down arrow keys respectively. Scroll Lock does not work with some applications. Num Lock

<Fn> + <F11>

Scroll Lock

<Fn> + <F12>

The embedded numeric keypad functions like a desktop numeric keypad. It is indicated by small characters located on the upper right corner of the keycaps. To simplify the keyboard legend, cursor-control key symbols are not printed on the keys. Desired access Number keys on embedded keypad Cursor-control keys on embedded keypad Main keyboard keys Num Lock on Type numbers in a normal manner. Hold <Shift> while using cursor-control keys. Hold <Fn> while typing letters on embedded keypad. Hold <Fn> while using cursor-control keys. Type the letters in a normal manner. Num Lock off Hotkeys Using the keyboard - 11 The computer employs hotkeys or key combinations to access most of the computer's controls like screen brightness and volume output. To activate hotkeys, press and hold the <Fn> key before pressing the other key in the hotkey combination. Hotkey

<Fn> + <F3>

Icon Function Description

<Fn> + <F4>

<Fn> + <F5>

<Fn> + <F6>

<Fn> + <F7>

<Fn> + <F8>

<Fn> + <F11>

<Fn> + <F12>

<Fn> + < >

<Fn> + < >

<Fn> + < >

<Fn> + < >

<Fn> +

<Home>

<Fn> +

<Pg Up>

Sleep Display off Display toggle Airplane mode Turns on / off the computer's network devices. Puts the computer in Sleep mode. Switches display output between the display screen, external monitor (if connected) and both. Turns the display screen backlight off to save power. Press any key to return. Turns the built-in touchpad on and off. Touchpad toggle Speaker toggle Turns the speakers on and off. Turns the embedded numeric keypad on or off. Turns the scroll lock feature on or off. Increases the screen Brightness up brightness. Decreases the screen Brightness brightness. down Volume up Increases the sound volume. Volume down Decreases the sound volume. NumLk Scr Lk Play/Pause Stop Play or pause a selected media file. Stop playing the selected media file. 12 - Using the keyboard Hotkey

<Fn> +

<Pg Dn>

<Fn> +

<End>

Icon Function Previous Next Description Return to the previous media file. Jump to the next media file. Windows keys The keyboard has two keys that perform Windows-specific functions. Key Description Pressed alone it returns to the Start screen or to return to the last open app. It can also be used with other keys for special functions, please check Windows Help. This key has the same effect as clicking the right mouse button; it opens the application's context menu. Windows key Application key TOUCHPAD Touchpad - 13 Touchpad basics The touchpad controls the arrow (or 'cursor') on the screen. As you slide your finger across the touchpad, the cursor will follow this movement. Note The touchpad is sensitive to finger movement; the lighter the touch, the better the response. Please keep the touchpad and your fingers dry and clean. The cursor is controlled by some basic gestures:

Single-finger slide: Slide a finger across the touchpad to move the cursor. Single-finger press or tap: Press the touchpad down, or lightly tap the touchpad with your finger, to perform a 'click', which will select or start an item. Quickly repeat the tap to perform a double tap or 'double click'. Single-finger press in the bottom-right corner: Press the bottom right corner of the touchpad to perform a 'right click'. In the Start screen, the app commands, in most apps this will open a context menu related to the selected item. this will toggle Drag: Press and hold the bottom left corner of the touchpad, or tap twice anywhere on the touchtap, then slide a second finger across the touchpad to select all items in an area. Touchpad gestures Windows 8.1 and many applications support touchpad gestures that use one or more fingers. Note Support for touchpad gestures depends on the active application. 14 - Touchpad This allows you to control applications with a few simple gestures, such as:

Swipe in from edge: Access Windows tools by swiping into the center of the touchpad from the right or left edge. Swipe in from right: Toggle the charms. Swipe in from left: Switch to the previous app. Two-finger slide: Swiftly scroll through web pages, documents and playlists by placing two fingers on the touchpad and moving both in any direction. Two-finger pinch: Zoom in and out of photos, maps and documents with a simple finger-and-thumb gesture. RECOVERY Recovery - 15 If you are having trouble with your computer, and the frequently asked questions (see Frequently asked questions on page 68) do not help, you can 'recover' your computer - i.e. return it to an earlier state. This section describes the recovery tools available on your computer. Acer provides Acer Recovery Management, which allows you to create a recovery backup, a drivers and applications backup, and to start recovery options, either using Windows tools, or the recovery backup. Note Acer Recovery Management is only available with a pre-installed Windows operating system. Important We recommend that you create a Recovery Backup and Drivers and Applications Backup and as soon as possible. In certain situations a full recovery will require a USB recovery backup. Creating a recovery backup To reinstall from a USB storage drive, you must first create a recovery backup. The recovery backup includes the entire original contents of your computers hard drive, including Windows and all factory-loaded software and drivers. Using this backup will restore your computer to the same state as when you purchased it, while giving you an option to retain all settings and personal data. Note Since the recovery backup requires at least 16 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 32 GB or larger. 16 - Recovery 1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. 2.Click Create Factory Default Backup. The Recovery Drive window opens. Make sure Copy contents from the recovery partition to the recovery drive is selected. This provides the most complete and safest recovery backup. 3.Plug in the USB drive then click Next. Since the recovery backup requires at least 16 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 32 GB or larger. Recovery - 17 4.You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 5.Follow the process until it completes. 6.After creating the recovery backup, you can choose to delete the recovery this information, you can only use the USB recovery backup to restore your computer, if you lose or erase the USB drive, you cannot restore your computer. information on your computer. If you delete 7.Unplug the USB drive and label it clearly. Important Write a unique, descriptive label on the backup, such as 'Windows Recovery Backup'. Make sure you keep the backup in a safe place that you will remember. Creating a drivers and applications backup To create a Drivers and Applications Backup, that contains the factory-loaded software and drivers needed by your computer, you 18 - Recovery may use either a USB storage drive or, if your computer features a DVD recorder, one or more blank recordable DVDs. 1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. 2.Click Create Drivers and Applications Backup. Plug in the USB drive or insert a blank DVD into the optical drive, then click Next. If you are using a USB drive, make sure your USB drive has enough capacity before continuing. If using DVDs, it will also show the number of blank, recordable discs you will need to complete the recovery discs. Make sure that you have the required number of identical, blank discs. 3.Click Start to copy files.You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 4.Follow the process until it completes:

If you are using optical discs, the drive ejects each disc as it completes burning it. Remove the disc from the drive and mark it with a permanent marker. If multiple discs are required, insert a new disc when prompted, then click OK. Continue until the process is complete. If you are using a USB drive, unplug the drive and label it clearly. Recovery - 19 Important Write a unique, descriptive label on each backup, such as 'Drivers and Applications Backup'. Make sure you keep the backup in a safe place that you will remember. Recovering your system To recover your system:

1.Perform minor fixes. If only one or two items of software or hardware have stopped working correctly, the problem may be solved by reinstalling the software or the device drivers. To reinstall software and drivers that were pre-installed at the factory, see Reinstalling drivers and applications on page 20. For instructions on reinstalling software and drivers that were not pre-installed, see that products documentation or support Web site. 2.Revert to a previous system condition. If reinstalling software or drivers does not help, then the problem may be solved by returning your system to a previous state when everything was working correctly. For instructions, see Returning to an earlier system snapshot on page 22. 3.Reset your operating system. If nothing else has solved the problem and you want to reset your system, but keep your user information, see Returning your system to its factory condition on page 23. 4.Reset your system to its factory condition. If nothing else has solved the problem and you want to reset your system to factory condition, see Returning your system to its factory condition on page 23. 20 - Recovery Reinstalling drivers and applications As a troubleshooting step, you may need to reinstall the applications and device drivers that came pre-installed on your computer from the factory. You can reinstall using either your hard drive or the backup you have created. Other applications - If you need to reinstall software that did not come pre-installed on your computer, you need to follow that softwares installation instructions. New device drivers - If you need to reinstall device drivers that did not come pre-installed on your computer, follow the instructions provided with the device. If you are reinstalling using Windows and the recovery information stored on your computer:

1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. 2.Click Reinstall Drivers or Applications. 3.You should see the Contents section of the Acer Resource Center. Recovery - 21 Images for reference only. 4.Click the install icon for the item you want to install, then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation. Repeat this step for each item you want to reinstall. If you are reinstalling from a Drivers and Applications Backup on a DVD or USB drive:

1.Insert the Drivers and Applications Backup into the disc drive or connect it to a free USB port. If you inserted a DVD wait for Acer Resource Center to start. If Acer Resource Center does not start automatically, press the Windows key + <E>, then double-click on the optical drive icon. If you are using a USB drive, press the Windows key + <E>, then double-click on the drive that contains the backup. Double-click on ResourceCenter. 22 - Recovery 2.You should see the Contents section of the Acer Resource Center. Images for reference only. 3.Click the install icon for the item you want to install, then follow the onscreen prompts to complete the installation. Repeat this step for each item you want to reinstall. Returning to an earlier system snapshot Microsoft System Restore periodically takes a 'snapshot' of your system settings and saves them as restore points. In most cases of hard-to-resolve software problems, you can return to one of these restore points to get your system running again. Windows automatically creates an additional restore point each day, and also each time you install software or device drivers. Note For more information about using Microsoft System Restore, from Start, type Help and then click Help and Support in the list of apps. Type Windows system restore in the Search Help box, then press Enter. Returning to a restore point 1.From Start, type Control Panel and then click Control Panel in the list of apps. 2.Click System and Security > Action Center, then click Recovery at the bottom of the window. 3.Click Open System Restore, then Next. Recovery - 23 4.Click the latest restore point (at a time when your system worked correctly), click Next, then Finish. 5.A confirmation window appears; click Yes. Your system is restored using the restore point you specified. This process may take several minutes, and may restart your computer. Returning your system to its factory condition If your computer experiences problems that are not recoverable by other methods, you may need to reinstall everything to return your system to its factory condition. You can recover from either your hard drive or the recovery backup you have created. If you can still run Windows and have not deleted the recovery partition, see Recovering from Windows below. If you cannot run Windows, your original hard drive has been completely re-formatted or you have installed a replacement hard drive, see Recovering from a recovery backup on page 26. Recovering from Windows Start Acer Recovery Management:

From Start, type Recovery and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. Two options are available, Restore Factory Settings (Reset my PC) or Customized Restore (Refresh my PC). Restore Factory Settings deletes everything on your hard drive, then reinstalls Windows and all software and drivers that were pre-installed on your system. If you can access important files on your hard drive, back them up now. See Restore Factory Settings with Acer Recovery Management on page 24. Customized Restore will attempt to retain your files (user data) but will reinstall all software and drivers. Software installed since you purchased your PC will be removed (except software installed from 24 - Recovery the Windows Store). See Customized Restore with Acer Recovery Management on page 25. Restore Factory Settings with Acer Recovery Management 1.Click Restore Factory Settings. Important Restore Factory Settings will erase all files on your hard drive. 2.The Reset your PC window opens. Images for reference only. 3.Click Next, then choose how to erase your files:

a.Just remove my files quickly erases all files before restoring your computer and takes about 30 minutes. b.Fully clean the drive completely cleans the drive after each file is erased, so no files can be viewed after the recovery. Cleaning the drive takes much longer, up to 5 hours, but is much more secure as old files are completely removed. 4.Click Reset. 5.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. 6.After the recovery has finished, you can start using your computer by repeating the first-start process. Recovery - 25 Recovering from the hard drive during startup 1.Turn on your computer and press <Alt> + <F10> during startup. A screen appears asking you to choose the keyboard layout. 2.Several options are now presented. Click Troubleshoot. 3.Click either Refresh your PC or Reset your PC. Note

"Refresh your PC" enables you to restore your computer to the default factory condition with files intact. "Reset your PC" completely removes all your files and resets your computer to factory settings. 4.Click Next. The process will take several minutes. Customized Restore with Acer Recovery Management 1.Click Customized Restore (Retain User Data). 26 - Recovery 2.The Refresh your PC window opens. Images for reference only. 3.Click Next, then Refresh. 4.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. This process takes about 30 minutes. Recovering from a recovery backup To recover from a recovery backup on a USB drive:

1.Find your recovery backup. 2.If your computer does not have a built-in keyboard, make sure a keyboard is attached to your computer. 3.Plug in the USB drive and turn on your computer. 4.If it is not already enabled, you must enable the F12 Boot Menu:

a. Press <F2> when starting your computer. b. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Main menu. c. Press the down key until F12 Boot Menu is selected, press <F5>

to change this setting to Enabled. d. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Exit menu. e. Depending on the type of BIOS your computer uses, select Save Changes and Exit or Exit Saving Changes and press Enter. Select OK or Yes to confirm. f. Your computer will restart. 5.During startup, press <F12> to open the boot menu. The boot menu allows you to select which device to start from, select the USB drive. a. Use your arrow keys to select USB Device, then press Enter. b. Windows starts from the recovery backup instead of the normal startup process. 6.Select your keyboard type. 7.Select Troubleshoot and then choose the type of recovery to use:

Recovery - 27 a. Click Advanced then System Restore to start Microsoft System Restore:

Microsoft System Restore periodically takes a snapshot of your system settings and saves them as restore points. In most cases of hard-to-resolve software problems, you can return to one of these restore points to get your system running again. b. Click Reset your PC to start the reset process:

Reset your PC deletes everything on your hard drive, then reinstalls Windows and all software and drivers that were pre-

installed on your system. If you can access important files on your hard drive, back them up now. See Reset your PC from the recovery backup below. c. Click Refresh your PC to start the refresh process:

Refresh your PC will attempt to retain your files (user data) but will reinstall all software and drivers. Software installed since you purchased your PC will be removed (except software installed from the Windows Store). See Refresh your PC from the recovery backup on page 28. Reset your PC from the recovery backup Important Reset your PC will erase all files on your hard drive. 1.The Reset your PC window opens. Images for reference only. 28 - Recovery 2.Click Next. 3.Select the operating system to recover (normally only one option is available). 4.Choose to keep any changes to the hard drive:

a. If you have deleted the recovery partition or otherwise changed the partitions on the hard drive and want to keep these changes, select No. b. To restore your computer to Factory Settings, select Yes. 5.Choose how to erase your files:

a.Just remove my files quickly erases all files before restoring your computer and takes about 30 minutes. b.Fully clean the drive completely cleans the drive after each file is erased, so no files can be viewed after the recovery. Cleaning the drive takes much longer, up to 5 hours, but is much more secure as old files are completely removed. 6.Click Reset. 7.After the recovery has finished, you can start using your computer by repeating the first-start process. Refresh your PC from the recovery backup 1.The Refresh your PC window opens. 2.Click Next. 3.Select the operating system to recover (normally only one option is available). 4.Click Refresh. 5.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. This process takes about 30 minutes. CONNECTING TO THE INTERNET Connecting to the Internet - 29 Note Information in this section may not apply to your computer. This chapter includes basic information on types of connections, and getting connected to the Internet. For detailed information, please refer to Network connections on page 16. Connecting with a cable Built-in network feature The built-in network feature makes it easy for you to connect your computer to the Internet using a cable. But first, an Internet Service Provider (ISP) -- usually a phone or cable company -- will have to go to your home or office to set up Internet service. The ISP will install a small box, called a router, that will allow you to connect to the Internet. Once your router is set up, all you have to do is plug one end of a network cable into the network port on your computer, and the other end into a port on your router. (Refer to the image below.) Then, you'll be ready to get online. 30 - Connecting to the Internet Connecting wirelessly Connecting to a wireless LAN A wireless LAN (or WLAN) is a wireless local area network, which can link two or more computers without using wires. Once connected to WLAN, you can access the Internet. You can also share files, other devices, and even your Internet connection itself. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft may be prohibited. All wireless devices must be switched off before boarding an aircraft and during take-off, as they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. You may turn on your computers wireless devices only when informed that it is safe to do so by the cabin crew. Your computer's wireless connection is turned on by default and Windows will detect and display a list of available networks during setup. Select your network and enter the password if required. Acer notebook computers feature an Airplane mode hotkey that turns the network connection on or off. You can use the network management options to turn your wireless network on/off or control what is shared over the network. From the Start screen, start typing wireless then select Connect to a network or Change Wi-Fi settings. Otherwise, open the instructions. Internet Explorer and follow Note Please refer to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or router documentation for details on connecting to the Internet. USING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION Using a Bluetooth connection - 31 Bluetooth is a technology enabling you to transfer data wirelessly over short distances between many different types of devices. Bluetooth-

enabled devices include computers, cell phones, tablets, wireless headsets, and keyboards. To use Bluetooth, you must ensure the following:

1.Bluetooth is enabled on both devices. 2.Your devices are "paired" (or connected). Enabling and disabling Bluetooth The Bluetooth adapter must be enabled on both devices. For your computer, this may be an external switch, a software setting, or a separate Bluetooth dongle plugged into the computers USB port (if no internal Bluetooth adapter is available). Note Please check your devices owners manual to determine how to turn on its Bluetooth adapter. Enable Bluetooth and add a device Every new device must first be "paired" with your computers Bluetooth adapter. This means it must first be authenticated for security purposes. You only need to pair once. After that, simply turning on the Bluetooth adapter of both devices will connect them. Bluetooth on your computer is disabled by default. To enable your computers Bluetooth adapter, do the following:

1.Open the Charms and select Settings > Change PC Settings > PC and devices > Bluetooth, or press the Windows key + <W> and then type Wireless; in the results, click on Bluetooth settings. 2.Click the toggle next to Bluetooth to enable/disable it. 3.Your computer will automatically start searching for devices, as well as make itself visible to other devices. 32 - Using a Bluetooth connection 4.Tap the device you wish to add from the list of discovered devices, and tap Pair. A code displays on your computer, which should match the code displayed on your device. Select Yes. Then, accept the pairing from your device. Note Some devices using older versions of the Bluetooth technology require both devices to enter a PIN. In the case of one of the devices not having any inputs

(as in a headset), the passcode is hardcoded into the device (usually "0000"

or "1234"). Consult your devices user manual for more information. ACER TOUCH TOOLS Acer Touch Tools - 33 Acer Touch Tools makes using your Windows device easier and more convenient. You can select, drag or tap on small items in the user interface. You can run Acer Touch Tools, from Start or from the Desktop taskbar. Touch tool controls The Touch Tools control panel has several icons:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No. Item 1 Move 2 AccuFinger Description Tap the Move tab and drag the Touch Tools panel to reposition it. Displays or hides the AccuFinger pointer. Tap the icon to display the pointer, and again to hide it. The AccuFinger pointer will also hide automatically after a specified number of seconds, which you can set in the configuration window. 34 - Acer Touch Tools No. Item 3 Multi-select 4 5 6 7 8 ESC simulation Touch Tools configuration Gateway Screen Grasp Close AccuFinger pointer Pointing Description Turns the multi-select feature on and off. Tap the multi-select icon to turn it on. Tap it again to turn multi-select off. Tap on the ESC icon to send an Escape command to the system. Tap to open the Touch Tools configuration window. See Settings on page 35. Tap this icon to run the Acer Screen Grasp utility. See Acer Screen Grasp on page 37. Tap the X to close Acer Touch Tools. Both AccuFinger and the Touch Tools panel will close. The AccuFinger pointer's fine tip allows you to work with even very small screen elements. This can be particularly helpful when using operating system setting and configuration windows with small buttons, boxes or other small items. Using AccuFinger With AccuFinger you can:

Point: Place your fingertip on the pointer pad and drag it around. The pointer direction changes automatically as you move around the screen. Select: Perform all standard touch screen cursor commands including tap, double-tap, drag, and drag-select, etc. Drag: To drag something, position the AccuFinger pointer on it, press briefly on the pointer pad to activate drag mode, then drag the selected item to a new position. Display: Display a context-sensitive menu by holding your fingertip on the pointer pad for a moment until the menu appears, then stop touching the pad and select a menu command. Text edit: You can select text in supported programs by tapping on a word or text block to select it or insert the cursor. You can then type or perform other operations on the selected text. Acer Touch Tools - 35 RepliView Your touch devices onscreen virtual keyboard can sometimes block your view of where you are typing. RepliView displays a small pop-up window above the onscreen keyboard that displays a view of where you are typing so that you can see what you are doing. This feature operates automatically when Touch Tools is running. Settings You can adjust the settings to suit your needs, including setting the AccuFinger pointer size and timeout. You can also select either right 36 - Acer Touch Tools or left-hand operation, which optimizes pointer orientation for the selected mode. ACER SCREEN GRASP Acer Screen Grasp - 37 Acer Screen Grasp is a handy screen capture tool that allows you to capture all or part of anything thats displayed on your computers screen. It works for both the desktop and Start screen applications. To launch Acer Screen Grasp, press <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <PrtSc>. Once you have opened the application you can activate the launch gesture: Tapping the screen with three fingers. Note The three-finger gesture is disabled by default. You can enable it from Settings. Overview 1 2 3 4 5 6 The toolbar at the top of the screen allows you to change screen capture options and settings. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Capture: Capture a rectangular or circular area of the screen. Freeform capture: Capture a freeform part of the screen. Window capture: Capture all or part of an open window. Webpage capture: Capture a whole webpage, including parts of the page that are not currently visible. Full screen capture: Capture the full screen. Settings: Change the defaults. 38 - Acer Screen Grasp Adjusting the Settings Tap the Settings icon to adjust the defaults for Acer Screen Grasp. You can enable or disable the launch gesture (tap the screen with three fingers), set the app to launch the editing tool after capturing, pin the program to the taskbar, view a short introduction tutorial, or view the Help content. The editing tool After youve captured the screen, you can edit the image. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 Description Undo. Redo. Pencil tool. No. 1 2 3 Acer Screen Grasp - 39 No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Description Marker tool. Text tool. Eraser. Mosaic effect. Lasso tool. Share capture to... Windows clipboard Facebook Acer Scrapboard Word PowerPoint Outlook Save. Pin/unpin the toolbars. 40 - Acer Scrapboard ACER SCRAPBOARD Acer Scrapboard is a useful tool to manage your screen captures. Screen captures are automatically sorted by date. Tap the Explorer. icon on the screen capture to open the website in Internet You can also create tags to assist in sorting your images. 1.Tap and drag an image down to open the menu at the bottom of the screen. 2.Tap Create tag to create a tag. 3.Tap Tags to open the list of available tags, and check each tag that you would like to assign to the image. ACER BACKUP MANAGER Acer Backup Manager - 41 Acer Backup Manager is a utility that enables you to do a variety of backup functions each accomplished in only three simple steps. You can even set these functions to automatically recur as often as you like. To start Acer Backup Manager in Windows 8, simply start typing Backup Manager. Alternatively, from the desktop, select Acer Backup Manager. This opens the Welcome screen; from this screen you can select the type of backup youd like to create:

Back Up My Files: Select files to back up. Image My Drive: Create a backup file for the entire drive. You can burn this file to a DVD, save them to another drive on your computer*, or save them to removable media (i.e. a flash drive) to restore your computer at a later time. Migrate My Files: Allows you to copy files to a USB device so that you can migrate files from your old computer to your new one or any other computer with Acer Backup Manager. Clear out / Restore Files: Remove seldom used files to free up disk space or restore files from your backup. Select the backup type youd like to make and select the files or drive you want to back up, then follow the onscreen instructions:

42 - Acer Backup Manager 1.Select the content you want to back up. The less content you select, the quicker the process will be, but it will increase your risks of losing data. 2.Select where you want the backup copies to be stored. Your options include removable media, a drive on your computer*, CD/DVD media, a remote PC, or the cloud using Microsoft SkyDrive. 3.Select how often you want Acer Backup Manager to create backups. Once you have finished these three steps, backups will be created according to the schedule. Note

*You will need to select an external drive or your D: drive; Acer Backup Manager cannot store a backup on the same drive that you are trying to back up. If you wish to change your settings at any time, go to the Acer Backup Manager profiles screen. To get there from the Acer Backup Manager welcome screen, click Launch My Backup Profiles. From here you can edit or delete existing backup profiles. Contact pickup - 43 CONTACT PICKUP Sending your contact information As a business user, being able to quickly exchange contact information with colleagues, co-workers, and anyone you meet makes life just a little bit easier. To help, Acer has created an application that enables you to easily share your contact information. After you have created your contact information, from Start, type 'Contact Pickup' and then click the Contact Pickup icon. Your computer generates a QR code of your contact information enabling others to use their mobile devices QR code scanning app to save your contact information. They can then follow the prompts on their device for adding your info to their contacts list. 1 -

Keeping your computer and data safe... In this section you will find:

How to secure your computer Setting passwords What you need to prepare when youre traveling How to get the most out of your battery BIOS UTILITY BIOS utility - 2 The BIOS utility is a hardware configuration program built into your computer's BIOS. Your computer is already properly configured and optimized, and you do not normally need to run this utility. However, if you encounter configuration problems, you may need to run it. To activate the BIOS utility, press <F2> during the POST while the computer logo is being displayed. Boot sequence To set the boot sequence in the BIOS utility, activate the BIOS utility, then select Boot from the categories listed at the top of the screen. Setting passwords To set a password on boot, activate the BIOS utility, then select Security from the categories listed at the top of the screen. Find Password on boot: and use the <F5> and <F6> keys to enable this feature. 3 - Securing your computer SECURING YOUR COMPUTER Your computer is a valuable investment that you need to take care of. Learn how to protect and take care of your computer. Security features include hardware and software locks a security notch and passwords. Using a computer security lock The computer comes with a Kensington-compatible security slot for a security lock. Wrap a computer security lock cable around an immovable object such as a table or handle of a locked drawer. Insert the lock into the notch and turn the key to secure the lock. Some keyless models are also available. Using passwords Passwords protect your computer from unauthorized access. Setting these passwords creates several different levels of protection for your computer and data:

Supervisor Password prevents unauthorized entry into the BIOS utility. Once set, you must enter this password to gain access to the BIOS utility. See Setting passwords on page 2. User Password secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. Password on Boot secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. Important Do not forget your Supervisor Password! If you forget your password, please get in touch with your dealer or an authorized service center. Entering passwords Securing your computer - 4 When a password is set, a password prompt appears in the center of the display screen. When the Supervisor Password is set, a prompt appears when you enter the BIOS utility. Type the Supervisor Password and press <Enter> to access the BIOS utility. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press <Enter>. When the User Password is set and the password on boot parameter is enabled, a prompt appears at boot-up. Type the User Password and press <Enter> to use the computer. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press <Enter>. Important You have three chances to enter a password. If you fail to enter the password correctly after three tries, the system halts. Press and hold the power button for four seconds to shut down the computer. Then turn on the computer again, and try again. 5 - Power management POWER MANAGEMENT This computer has a built-in power management unit that monitors system activity. System activity refers to any activity involving one or more of following devices: keyboard, mouse, hard disk, peripherals connected to the computer, and video memory. If no activity is detected for a period of time, the computer stops some or all of these devices in order to conserve energy. the Saving power Disable Fast startup Your computer uses Fast startup to start quickly, but also uses a small amount of power to check for signals to start. These checks will slowly drain your computers battery. If you prefer to reduce your computers power requirements and environmental impact, turn off Fast startup:

Note If Fast startup is off, your computer will take longer to start from Sleep. Your computer will also not start if it receives an instruction to start over a network (Wake on LAN). 1.Open the desktop. 2.Click Power Options in the Notification area. 3.Select More Power Options. 4.Select Choose what the power buttons do. 5.Select Change settings that are currently unavailable. Power management - 6 6.Scroll down and disable Turn on fast startup. 7.Select Save changes. 7 - Battery pack BATTERY PACK The computer uses an embedded Lithium battery that gives you long use between charges. Battery characteristics The battery is recharged whenever you connect the computer to the AC adapter. Your computer supports charge-in-use, enabling you to recharge the battery while you continue to operate the computer. However, recharging with the computer turned off significantly reduces charge time. The battery will come in handy when you travel or during a power failure. Charging the battery Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and connect to a mains power outlet. You can continue to operate your computer on AC power while your battery is charging. However, charging the battery with the computer turned off significantly reduces charge time. Note You are advised to charge the battery before retiring for the day. Charging the battery overnight before traveling enables you to start the next day with a fully charged battery. Conditioning a new battery pack Before you use a battery pack for the first time, there is a conditioning process that you should follow:

1.Connect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery. 2.Turn on the computer and complete setting up the operating system. 3.Disconnect the AC adapter. 4.Operate the computer using battery power. 5.Reconnect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery again. Battery pack - 8 Follow these steps again until the battery has been charged and discharged three times. Use this conditioning process for all new batteries, or if a battery hasn't been used for a long time. Warning Do not expose battery packs to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Extreme temperatures may adversely affect the battery pack. The battery conditioning process ensures your battery accepts the maximum possible charge. Failure to follow this procedure will prevent you from obtaining the maximum battery charge, and will also shorten the effective lifespan of the battery. In addition, the useful lifespan of the battery is adversely affected by the following usage patterns:

Using the computer on constant AC power. Not discharging and recharging the battery to its extremes, as described above. Frequent use; the more you use the battery, the faster it will reach the end of its effective life. An embedded battery has a life span of more than 1,000 charge/discharge cycles. Optimizing battery life Optimizing battery life helps you get the most out of battery operation, prolonging the charge/recharge cycle and improving recharging efficiency. You are advised to follow the suggestions set out below:

Use AC power whenever possible, reserving battery for mobile use. Remove accessories that are not being used (e.g. a USB disk drive), as they can continue to draw power. Store your PC in a cool, dry place. The recommended temperature is 10 C (50 F) to 30 C (86 F). Higher temperatures cause the battery to self-discharge faster. Excessive recharging decreases the battery life. Look after your AC adapter and battery. 9 - Battery pack Checking the battery level The power meter indicates the current battery level. Rest the cursor over the battery/power icon on the taskbar to see the battery's present charge level. Battery-low warning When using battery power pay attention to the power meter. Important Connect the AC adapter as soon as possible after the battery-low warning appears. Data may be lost if the battery is allowed to become fully depleted and the computer shuts down. When the battery-low warning appears, the recommended course of action depends on your situation:

Situation The AC adapter and a power outlet are available. The AC adapter or a power outlet is unavailable. Recommended Action 1. Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and then connect to the main power supply. 2. Save all necessary files. 3. Resume work. Turn off the computer if you want to recharge the battery rapidly. 1. Save all necessary files. 2. Close all applications. 3. Turn off the computer. TRAVELING WITH YOUR COMPUTER Traveling with your computer - 10 This section gives you tips and hints to consider when moving around or traveling with your computer. Disconnecting from the desktop Follow these steps to disconnect your computer from external accessories:

1.Save any open files. 2.Remove discs from optical drive. 3.Shut down the computer or put it into Sleep or Hibernate mode. 4.Close the display cover. 5.Disconnect the cord from the AC adapter. 6.Disconnect the keyboard, pointing device, printer, external monitor and other external devices. 7.Disconnect the Kensington lock if you are using one to secure the computer. Moving around When you are just moving within short distances, for example, from your office desk to a meeting room. Preparing the computer Before moving the computer, close and latch the display cover to place it in Sleep mode. You can now safely take the computer anywhere you go within the building. To wake the computer from Sleep mode, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. If you are taking the computer to a client's office or a different building, you may choose to shut down the computer:

Press the Windows key + <C>, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down Or:

11 - Traveling with your computer You can put the computer in Sleep mode by pressing <Fn> + <F4> or by closing the display. When you are ready to use the computer again, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. Note The computer may enter Hibernation or Deep Sleep mode after being in Sleep mode for a period of time. What to bring to meetings If your meeting is relatively short, you probably do not need to bring anything with you other than your computer. If your meeting will be longer, or if your battery is not fully charged, you may want to bring the AC adapter with you to plug in your computer in the meeting room. If the meeting room does not have an electrical outlet, reduce the drain on the battery by putting the computer in Sleep mode. Press

<Fn> + <F4> or close the display cover whenever you are not actively using the computer. Taking the computer home When you are moving from your office to your home or vice versa. Preparing the computer After disconnecting the computer from your desktop, follow these steps to prepare the computer for the trip home:

Check that you have removed all media and compact discs from the drive(s). Failure to remove the media can damage the drive head. Pack the computer in a protective case that can prevent the computer from sliding around and cushion it if it should fall. Warning Avoid packing items next to the top cover of the computer. Pressure against the top cover can damage the screen. Traveling with your computer - 12 What to take with you Unless you have some items at home, take the following items with you:

AC adapter and power cord. The printed Setup Guide. Special considerations Follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling to and from work:

Minimize the effects of temperature changes by keeping the computer with you. If you need to stop for an extended period of time and cannot carry the computer with you, leave the computer in the trunk of the car to avoid exposing the computer to excessive heat. Changes in temperature and humidity can cause condensation. Allow the computer to return to room temperature, and inspect the screen for condensation before turning on the computer. If the temperature change is greater than 10 C (18 F), allow the computer to come to room temperature slowly. If possible, leave the computer for 30 minutes in an environment with a temperature between outside and room temperature. Setting up a home office If you frequently work on your computer at home, you may want to purchase a second AC adapter for use at home. With a second AC adapter, you can avoid carrying the extra weight to and from home. If you use your computer at home for significant periods of time, you might also want to add an external keyboard, monitor or mouse. Traveling with the computer Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. 13 - Traveling with your computer When you are moving within a larger distance, for instance, from your office building to a client's office building or traveling locally. Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as if you were taking it home. Make sure that the battery in the computer is charged. Airport security may require you to turn on your computer when carrying it into the gate area. What to take with you Take the following items with you:

AC adapter Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer Special considerations In addition to the guidelines for taking the computer home, follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling:

Always take the computer as carry-on luggage. If possible, have the computer inspected by hand. Airport security X-

ray machines are safe, but do not put the computer through a metal detector. Traveling internationally Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. When you are moving from country to country. Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as you would normally prepare it for traveling. Traveling with your computer - 14 What to bring with you Bring the following items with you:

AC adapter. Power cords that are appropriate for your destination(s). Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer. Proof of purchase, in case you need to show it to customs officials. International Travelers Warranty passport. Special considerations Follow the same special considerations as when traveling with the computer. In addition, these tips are useful when traveling internationally:

When traveling in another country, check that the local AC voltage and the AC adapter power cord specifications are compatible. If not, purchase a power cord that is compatible with the local AC voltage. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power the computer. If you are using the modem, check if the modem and connector are compatible with the telecommunications system of the country you are traveling in. 1 -

Ports and connectors... In this section you will find:

Information on the ports and connectors fitted to your computer MEMORY CARD READER Memory card reader - 2 Connectivity options Your computer has a card reader and other ports/jacks that allow you to connect peripheral devices to your computer. For instructions on how to connect different external devices to the computer, read the following section. Memory card reader Memory cards are used in a wide selection of digital cameras, PDAs, MP3 players and mobile phones. Inserting a memory card 1.Align the card so that the connector points towards the port, with the connectors facing down. 2.Carefully slide the card into the port. If you find you need to use any force to insert the card, try reorientating the card slightly. 3.Push the card until it clicks into place. A few millimetres of the card will extend from beyond the slot. If the card contains some files, the Windows Auto Play window may appear (this depends on the contents of the card) and ask you if you wish to use a program to access the contents of the card. Select an option here if it is appropriate, otherwise select Cancel. If the card contains no files, or unknown files, a window will open showing the contents of the card. SD, SDHC and SDXC cards Different types of SD cards cover different capacities, while using the same overall design. SD cards contain up to 4 GB, SDHC cards contain up to 32 GB, and SDXC cards can contain up to 2048 GB 3 - Memory card reader

(2 TB). Your computer provides an SDHC or SDXC compatible card reader. Note SDXC memory cards can only be used in an SDXC-compatible reader; SD and SDHC cards can be used in either type. Removing a card from a memory card reader 1.Click on Show hidden icons arrow in the Notification Area (next to the clock). 2 2.Click on the Safely Remove Hardware icon. 3.Click on Eject SD Card (or the name of the device). 4.Wait until a Safe to Remove Hardware message is displayed. 5.Remove the card. 1 3 VIDEO AND AUDIO CONNECTORS Video and audio connectors - 4 Connect to a monitor with a VGA or DVI port (the type of connection supported depends on your computers configuration). The appropriate cable is usually included with the monitor. Follow these steps to connect an monitor to your computer:

1.Check that the computer is powered off and the monitor power switch is turned off. 2.Attach the video cable to the monitor port on the computer. Secure the cable connection with the screws provided. 3.Connect the monitor power cable and plug it into a properly grounded wall outlet. 4.Follow any setup instructions in the monitor's user's guide. 5.Turn on power to the monitor, then the computer. 6.Make sure that the current resolution and refresh rate do not exceed the specifications of the monitor. If necessary change the display settings used by the computer. Note To access the display controls, press the Windows key (

"Display" and then click on Display.

) + W, type Headphones and microphone These ports allow you to connect audio devices. Use the headphone port to plug in stereo headphones or powered speakers. Plugging an audio device to the headphone port disables the built-in speakers. Use the microphone port to connect an external microphone for mono recording; plugging in an external microphone disables the built-in microphone. Note Some computers have a single "combo" port that allows you to use single-pin headsets with a built-in microphone. These headsets are most commonly used with smartphones. 5 - HDMI HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a high-quality, digital audio/video interface. HDMI allows you to connect any compatible digital audio/video source, such as your computer, a set-top box, DVD player, and audio/video receiver to any compatible digital audio and/or video monitor, such as a digital television (DTV) with a single cable. The single cable keeps everything neat and tidy while ensuring easy connection and the best audio and visual quality. UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB) Universal Serial Bus (USB) - 6 The USB port is a high-speed port which allows you to connect USB peripherals, such as a mouse, an external keyboard, additional storage (external hard disks), or any other compatible device. Note Two USB standards are currently available on Acer computers: USB 2.0

(High-speed USB) and USB 3.0 (SuperSpeed USB). USB 2.0 ports on Acer computers have a black tongue in the port, while USB 3.0 ports have a blue tongue. For best performance, USB 3.0 devices should always be plugged into USB 3.0 ports. Consult your devices documentation to see which standard it supports. You can also charge devices such as tablets, smartphones, or other devices through a USB port. Some USB 3.0 ports support charging devices when the computer is in Hibernate or turned off. Additionally, you can use a USB hub to connect multiple devices to a single USB port. Important When removing a USB storage device, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <device>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral. 1 -

Got a question?

In this section you will find:

Frequently asked questions Tips for using Windows 8.1 Troubleshooting information How to protect yourself while online Where to find Acer service center contact information FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Frequently asked questions - 2 The following is a list of possible situations that may arise during the use of your computer. Easy solutions are provided for each one. I turned on the power, but the computer does not start or boot up. Look at the power indicator:

If it is not lit, no power is being supplied to the computer. Check the following:

If you are using on the battery, it may be low and unable to power the computer. Connect the AC adapter to recharge the battery pack. Make sure that the AC adapter is properly plugged into the computer and to the power outlet. If it is lit, check the following:

Is a disc in the optical drive? Remove it and press <Ctrl> + <Alt>

+ <Del> to restart the system. Do you have a USB storage device (USB disk or smartphone) plugged into your computer? Unplug it and press <Ctrl> + <Alt> +

<Del> to restart the system. Nothing appears on the screen. The computers power management system automatically blanks the screen to save power. Press any key to turn the display back on. If pressing a key does not turn the display back on, three things might be the cause:

The brightness level might be too low. Press <Fn> + < > (increase) to adjust the brightness level. The display device might be set to an external monitor. Press the display toggle hotkey <Fn> + <F5> to toggle the display back to the computer. If the power LED is flashing, the computer may be in Sleep or Hibernate mode. Press and release the power button to resume. No audio is heard from the computer. Check the following:

3 - Frequently asked questions The volume may be muted. Look at the volume control (speaker) icon in the taskbar. If it is crossed-out, click the icon and deselect the Mute all option. The volume level may be too low. Check the volume from the volume control (speaker) icon in the taskbar. You can also use the volume control buttons to adjust the volume. If headphones, earphones or external speakers are connected to the headphone jack on the computer, the internal speakers automatically turn off. The keyboard does not respond. Try attaching an external keyboard to a USB port on the computer. If it works, contact your dealer or an authorized service center as the internal keyboard cable may be loose. The printer does not work. Check the following:

Make sure that the printer is connected to a power outlet and that it is turned on. Make sure that the printer cable is connected securely to a USB port and the corresponding port on the printer. I want to restore my computer to its original settings. Note If your system is the multilingual version, the operating system and language you choose when you first turn on the system will be the only option for future recovery operations. This recovery process helps you restore the C: drive with the original software content that is installed when you purchased your computer. Warning Your C: drive will be reformatted and all data will be erased. It is important to back up all data files before using this option. Before performing a restore operation, please check the BIOS settings. 1.Check to see if Acer disk-to-disk recovery is enabled or not. Frequently asked questions - 4 2.Make sure the D2D Recovery setting in Main is Enabled. 3.Exit the BIOS utility and save changes. The system will reboot. Note To activate the BIOS utility, press <F2> when you see the Acer logo during boot up. For more information, see Recovering your system on page 19. Requesting service International Travelers Warranty (ITW) Your computer is backed by an International Travelers Warranty

(ITW) that gives you security and peace of mind when traveling. An ITW passport came with your computer and contains all you need to know about the ITW program. A list of available, authorized service centers is in this handy booklet. Read this passport thoroughly. Always have your ITW passport on hand, especially when you travel, to receive the benefits from our support centers. Attach your proof-of-

purchase to the ITW passport. If the country you are traveling in does not have an Acer-authorized ITW service site, you can still get in contact with our offices worldwide. Please visit www.acer.com. Before you call Please have the following information available when you call Acer for online service, and please be at your computer when you call. With your support, we can reduce the amount of time a call takes and help solve your problems efficiently. If there are error messages or beeps reported by your computer, write them down as they appear on the screen (or the number and sequence in the case of beeps). You are required to provide the following information:

Name: _______________________________________ Address: ______________________________________ Telephone number: _____________________________ Machine and model type: _________________________ Serial number: _________________________________ Date of purchase: ______________________________ Frequently ask 5 - Frequently asked questions Tips and hints for using Windows 8.1 We know this is a new operating system that will take some getting used to, so we've created a few pointers to help you get started. How do I get to Start?

Press the Windows key; tap the Start button on the desktop taskbar;

or swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap the Start charm. Wheres the Start button?

The Start button will appear in the desktop taskbar. Tapping it will open Start where you can launch apps. How do I see all of my apps?

Swipe upwards from the bottom of Start. Can I make the "All apps" view the default for Start?

Yes, you can, just follow these steps:

1.Go to the desktop. 2.Tap and hold the taskbar until you see the square outline. Select Properties from the menu that opens when you remove your finger. 3.From the Navigation tab, check Show the Apps view automatically when I go to Start. What are "Charms?"

Charms allow you to perform useful functions, such as sharing content, turning off your PC or changing settings. How do I access the charms?

Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards. Frequently asked questions - 6 Can I boot directly to the desktop?

Yes, you can, just follow these steps:

1.Go to the desktop. 2.Tap and hold the taskbar until you see the square outline. Select Properties from the menu that opens when you remove your finger. 3.From the Navigation tab, check Go to the desktop instead of Start when I sign in. How do I jump between apps?

Swipe the left-hand edge of the screen inwards to cycle through apps that are currently running. How do I turn off my computer?

Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards, tap Settings >

Power and select the action you'd like to take. Can I just turn off notifications?

You can turn off notifications during certain hours so that you can leave your computer running, but not be disturbed by notifications. 1.Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings >

Change PC settings > Search & apps > Notifications. 2.Move the Quiet hours slider to On and select times to start and stop disabling notifications. How do I unlock my computer?

Swipe the lock screen upwards and tap a user account icon to unlock the computer. If your account has a password set, you will need to enter the password to continue. Tap and hold the preview icon to see the characters you've entered to ensure the password is correct. 7 - Frequently asked questions Can I personalize the Lock screen?

You can personalize the lock screen with a different image, to run a slideshow of images, or to show you quick status and notifications to suit your personal needs. To change the background, swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings > Change PC settings > PC and devices

> Lock screen. From here you can:

Select a background image for the lock screen Turn the Slide show on or off Select lock screen apps. How do I set up the lock screen slideshow?

1.Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings >

Change PC settings > PC and devices > Lock screen. 2.Move the slider to On and select if the slideshow should be played while the computer is running on battery power. 3.Tap Add a folder and open the folder you wish to use (your Pictures folder will open by default). Tap Use this folder > OK. 4.You can see the list of folders under Add a folder. Select a folder name and tap Remove to remove the folder from the lock screen slideshow. 5.Change the other settings to suit your needs. How do I move tiles?

Tap and hold a tile to select it, then drag it to the place on Start that you want it to appear. Other tiles will be moved to accommodate the tile in its new location. Can I arrange tiles in groups?

Yes, you can. Tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. You will see Name group appear above unnamed groups. You can give the group(s) a name and arrange the tiles within the groups to suit your needs. Frequently asked questions - 8 Can I make tiles bigger or smaller?

Swipe upwards from bottom of the screen and tap Customize, tap the tile(s) you wish to resize and tap Resize. Select a size from the menu that appears. How do I close an app?

Swipe the window downwards from the top to the bottom of the screen. You need to swipe the window past the half-way point of the screen. Can I change the screen resolution?

Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Search, tap the text box to open the onscreen keyboard and start typing 'Control Panel' to display the results; tap Control Panel > Adjust screen resolution. How do I set the alarm?

Your computer can act as an alarm clock. Start typing Alarms to search for the Alarms app. 1.Set the time using the sliders on the left-hand side of the screen. 2.Select AM or PM. 3.Choose which days the alarm should go off. 4.Select the notification. 9 - Frequently asked questions 5.Save the alarm by tapping the Save icon in the upper right-hand corner. Delete Save Hour Minutes Note The alarm will only sound if your computer is awake at the set time. Where are my apps?

Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Search, type the name of the app you would like to open using the pop-up keyboard. Results will be displayed on the left-hand side of the screen. To view the complete list of apps, swipe upwards from the bottom of the screen and tap All apps. How do I make an app appear on Start?

If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on Start, Tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. Tap Pin to Start from the menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. How do I remove a tile from Start?

Tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. Tap the tile(s) you wish to remove and tap Unpin from Start from the Frequently asked questions - 10 menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. How do I make an app appear on my taskbar?

If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on the taskbar, tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. Select Pin to taskbar from the menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. How do I install apps?

You can download Windows Store apps from Store. You will need to have a Microsoft ID to purchase and download apps from Store. I can't find apps like Notepad and Paint! Where are they?

Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Search, type the name of the app you would like to open using the pop-up keyboard. Alternatively, open All apps and scroll to Windows Accessories to see the list of legacy programs. Can I use more than one app at a time?

1.Tap on a tile to open an app from the Start screen. 2.Return to the Start screen and repeat the process. 3.Swipe right from the left edge of the screen to display the last app that was opened. 4.Swipe right from the left edge of the screen until you see a column divider to display both apps simultaneously. Up to three apps may be displayed via three columns at the same time. Can I show my desktop apps first?

Yes, you can, just follow these steps:

1.Go to the desktop. 2.Tap and hold the taskbar until you see the square outline. Select Properties from the menu that opens when you remove your finger. 3.From the Navigation tab, check List desktop apps first in the Apps view when it's sorted by category. 11 - Frequently asked questions What is a Microsoft ID (account)?

A Microsoft account is an email address and password that you use to sign in to Windows. You can use any email address, but it is best if you choose the one you already use to communicate with friends and sign in to your favorite websites. When you sign in to your PC with a Microsoft account, you'll connect your PC to the people, files, and devices you care about. Do I need one?

You do not need a Microsoft ID to use Windows 8.1, but it makes life easier because you can sync data across different machines you sign in to using a Microsoft ID. How do I get one?

If you've already installed Windows 8.1 and didn't sign in with a Microsoft account or you don't have a Microsoft account and want to get one, swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings > Change PC settings > Accounts > Connect to a Microsoft account, and follow the onscreen instructions. How do I add a favorite to Internet Explorer?

Internet Explorer 10 doesn't have traditional favorites, instead you can pin shortcuts to Start. Once you have the page open, swipe upwards from the bottom edge of the screen to open the menu at the bottom of the screen. Tap Pin to Start. How do I check for Windows updates?

Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings >

Change PC settings > Update & recovery > Windows Update. Tap Check now. Where can I get more information?

For more information please visit the following pages:

Windows 8 and 8.1 tutorials: www.acer.com/windows8-tutorial Support FAQs: support.acer.com FREQUENTLY Frequently asked questions - 12 Troubleshooting This chapter shows you how to deal with common system problems. Read it before calling a technician if a problem occurs. Solutions to more serious problems require opening up the computer. Do not attempt to open the computer yourself; contact your dealer or authorized service center for assistance. Troubleshooting tips incorporates an advanced design This computer onscreen error message reports to help you solve problems. If the system reports an error message or an error symptom occurs, see "Error messages" below. If the problem cannot be resolved, contact your dealer. that delivers Error messages Corrective action If you receive an error message, note the message and take the corrective action. The following table lists the error messages in alphabetical order together with the recommended course of action. Error messages CMOS battery bad Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service CMOS checksum error center. Insert a system (bootable) disk, then press Disk boot failure

<Enter> to reboot. Press <F2> (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Hard disk 0 error Hard disk 0 extended type error I/O parity error Equipment configuration error 13 - Frequently asked questions Error messages Keyboard error or no keyboard connected Keyboard interface error Memory size mismatch Corrective action Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Press <F2> (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. If you still encounter problems after going through the corrective measures, please contact your dealer or an authorized service center for assistance. INTERNET AND ONLINE SECURITY Internet and online security - 14 First steps on the net Protecting your computer It is vital to protect your computer from viruses and attacks over the Internet (see Security on page 18). A comprehensive Internet security program is offered when you first start your computer. You should activate this protection as soon as possible, certainly before you connect to the Internet. Choose an Internet Service Provider Using the Internet has become a natural part of daily computing. Just a few simple steps can connect you to a vast collection of knowledge and communication tools. To accomplish these steps you should first select an Internet Service Provider (ISP), which supplies the connection between your computer and the Internet. You should research the ISPs available in your region, not forgetting to talk to friends and family about their experiences or to check reviews and consumer reports. The ISP you select will provide instructions on how to connect to the Internet (you may need additional software or a special box that connects to your phone line). Connection types Depending on your computer model, your location and your communication needs, you have several ways to connect to the Internet. Dial-up Some computers include a telephone dial-up (modem) connector. This allows you to connect to the Internet using your telephone line. With a dial-up connection, you cannot use the modem and the telephone simultaneously on a single phone line. This type of connection is recommended only if you have limited use of the 15 - Internet and online security Internet as the connection speed is low and connection time is typically charged per hour. DSL (e.g. ADSL) DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) is an always-on connection that runs over the phone line. As DSL and phone do not use the same frequencies, you can use your telephone at the same time you are connected to the Internet (this requires a micro-filter on each telephone socket to avoid interference). To be eligible for DSL, you must be located near an DSL-equipped phone exchange (service is sometimes unavailable in rural areas). Connection speeds vary depending on your location, but DSL generally provides very fast and reliable Internet connection. As the connection is always-on, it is generally charged at fixed monthly rates. Note A DSL connection requires an appropriate modem. A modem is usually provided by the ISP when you register. Many of these modems include an router that provides network and Wi-Fi access. Cable A cable connection provides fast and always-on Internet service via a cable television line. This service is generally available in large cities. You can use your telephone and watch cable TV at the same time you are connected to the Internet. 3G (WWAN or 'Wireless Wide-Area Network') A 3G connection allows you to use cellular networks (such as those used by a mobile phone) to connect to the Internet while away from home. The socket for a SIM card may be built in to your computer, or may require an external device, such as a USB modem or even an appropriately equipped mobile phone. Note If your computer includes a SIM card slot, you require a compatible SIM card and a contract with a cellular provider. Before using the 3G features, check with your service provider to see if any additional charges will be incurred, especially roaming charges. Internet and online security - 16 Network connections A LAN (Local Area Network) is a group of computers (for example, within an office building or home) that share a common communications line and resources. When you set up a network, you can share files, peripheral devices (such as a printer) and an Internet connection. You can set up a LAN using wired technologies (such as Ethernet) or wireless technologies (such as Wi-Fi or Bluetooth). Wireless networks A wireless LAN or WLAN is a wireless local area network, which may link two or more computers without using wires. Setting up a wireless network is easy and allows you to share files, peripheral devices and an Internet connection. What are benefits of a wireless network?

Mobility Wireless LAN systems allow you and other users of your home network to share access to files and devices connected to the network, for example a printer or scanner. Also you can share an internet connection with other computers in your home. Installation speed and simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be fast and easy and eliminates the need to pull cables through walls and ceilings. Components of a wireless LAN To set up your Wireless network at home you need to have the following:

Access point (router) Access points (routers) are two-way transceivers that broadcast data into the surrounding environment. Access points act as a mediator between wired and wireless network. Most routers have a built-in DSL modem that will allow you access to a high speed DSL internet connection. The ISP (Internet Service Provider) you have chosen normally supplies a modem/router with the subscription to their services. Read carefully the documentation supplied with your Access 17 - Internet and online security point/router for detailed setup instructions. Network cable (RJ45) A network cable (also called RJ45 cable) is used to connect the host computer to the access point (see illustration below); this type of cable may also be used to connect peripheral devices to the access point. Wireless adapter An internal wireless adapter is normally already installed in your computer. A button or controls in Windows allow you to activate or deactivate the adapter. Diagram of a working network 1.Access point/router 2.Desktop computer 3.Modem 4.Printer 5.Portable computer 6.PDA/Smartphone 7.Network cables (RJ45) Turning on/off a wireless network connection Most computers feature a Wi-Fi button that turns the network connection on or off. If your computer has wireless access, but does not feature a Communication button, you may turn your wireless network on or off, or control what is shared over the network with the network management options. Press the Windows key (

) + W, type

"HomeGroup" and then click on HomeGroup. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off all devices before boarding an aircraft; they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. Internet and online security - 18 Surf the Net!

To surf the Internet, you need a program called an Internet browser. Internet Explorer provides an easy and secure web browsing experience. As soon as you have your Internet access installed and you are connected, from Start, click the Internet Explorer tile or the icon located on the desktop and take your Internet experience to a new level!

Acer website To get you started why not visit our website, www.acer.com. Acer is dedicated to provide you with on-going personalied support. Check out our Support section to get help tailored to your needs. www.acer.com is your portal to a world of online activities and services: visit us regularly for the latest information and downloads!

Security You are probably eager to explore everything the Internet has to offer. In order for you to be safe online, Acer has pre-installed McAfee Internet Security Suite on your computer. McAfee Internet Security Suite runs quietly in the background to block todays complex threats and protect your identity when you shop, bank, or browse online. McAfee Internet Security Suite blocks online identity theft, detects and eliminates spyware, removes viruses and Internet worms, protects against hackers. Definitions What is a virus?

Malicious software, typically called viruses, are programs designed to infect and damage computers. Most viruses are transmitted over the Internet, emails or malicious Web sites. A typical virus will replicate and pass itself undetected to multiple computers. Other forms of nuisance, such as Trojan horses, worms or spam can infect your 19 - Internet and online security computer in various ways, using up resources or clogging up a network. Note Acer guarantees that your computer was 100% virus free at the time of purchase and does not cover damages due to viruses. What is spyware?

Spyware refers to generally unwanted programs that are downloaded onto your computer while connected to the Internet, often without you knowing it. Once it has infected your computer, it can snoop on your browsing activity, collect personal information, cause pop-up ads to appear, or even change the configuration of your computer. Spyware consumes resources on your computer; it can slow down your Internet connection or entire computer system, and even cause crashes. Spyware is sometimes used by unscrupulous companies to monitor and track the sites you visit on the Internet so as to determine your web-surfing habits and display targeted pop-up ads on your screen. However, some kinds of spyware go beyond simple tracking and actually monitor keystrokes and capture passwords, posing a serious security risk. What is malware?

Malicious software, also known as malware, is software designed to deliberately harm your computer. For example, viruses, worms, and Trojan horses are malicious software. To help protect your computer against malware, make sure it is using up-to-date antivirus and anti-

malware software. What is a personal firewall?

A personal firewall is a software program designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a private network. It acts as a shield to protect your Internet connection from unwanted connections, some of which may attempt to take control of your computer to install or re-

distribute viruses or malicious programs. Each connection to your computer is monitored - programs that attempt to receive information without your permission are detected and the firewall will display an alert. You can then decide if you will allow the connection, if the connection is to a program you are currently using then normally you Internet and online security - 20 would allow it (i.e. a game connecting to a multi-player server or an encyclopaedia making a content update). How to protect your computer Cybercrime prevention can be straight-forward - when armed with a little technical advice and common sense, many attacks can be avoided. In general, online criminals are trying to make their money as quickly and easily as possible. The more difficult you make their job, the more likely they are to leave you alone and move on to an easier target. The tips below provide basic information on how you can prevent online fraud. Keep your computer current with the latest patches and updates One of the best ways to keep attackers away from your computer is to apply patches and other software fixes when they become available. By regularly updating your computer, you block attackers from being able to take advantage of software flaws (vulnerabilities) that they could otherwise use to break into your system. While keeping your computer up-to-date will not protect you from all attacks, it makes it much more difficult for hackers to gain access to your system, blocks many basic and automated attacks completely, and might be enough to discourage less-determined attackers, so they will give up and look for a more vulnerable computer elsewhere. More recent versions of Microsoft Windows and other popular software can be configured to download and apply updates automatically so that you do not have to remember to check for the latest software. Taking advantage of auto-update features in your software is a great start toward keeping yourself safe online. Protect your computer with security software Several types of security software are necessary for basic online security. Security software essentials include firewall and antivirus programs. A firewall is usually your computer's first line of defense-it controls who and what can communicate with your computer online. You could think of a firewall as a sort of "policeman" that watches all the data attempting to flow in and out of your computer on the Internet, allowing communications that it knows are safe and blocking

"bad" traffic such as attacks from ever reaching your computer. 21 - Internet and online security The next line of defense many times is your antivirus software, which monitors all online activities such as email messages and Web browsing and protects an individual from viruses, worms, Trojan horse and other types of malicious programs. Your antivirus and antispyware software should be configured to update itself, and it should do so every time you connect to the Internet. Integrated security suites such as McAfee Internet Security Suite, which combine firewall, antivirus, antispyware with other features such as antispam and parental controls, have become popular as they offer all the security software needed for online protection in a single package. Many people find using a comprehensive security suite an attractive alternative to installing, configuring and updating several different types of security software. A complete version of McAfee Internet Security Suite is pre-installed on your Acer system. It includes a free trial subscription to protection updates. Make sure you Activate it!

Choose strong passwords and keep them safe following Passwords are a fact of life on the Internet today; we use them for everything from ordering flowers and online banking to logging into our favorite airline Web site to see how many miles we have accumulated. The tips can help make your online experiences secure:

Selecting a password that cannot be easily guessed is the first step toward keeping passwords secure and out of the wrong hands. Strong passwords have eight characters or more and use a combination of letters, numbers and symbols (e.g., # $ % ! ?). Avoid using any of the following as your password: your login name, anything based on your personal information such as your last name, and words that can be found in the dictionary, especially

"password." Try to select especially strong, unique passwords for protecting activities like online banking. Keep your passwords in a safe place and try not to use the same password for every service you use online. Change passwords on a regular basis, at least every 90 days. This can limit the damage caused by someone who has already gained access to your account. If you notice something suspicious with one of your online accounts, one of the first steps you can take is to change your password. Protect your personal information Internet and online security - 22 Exercise caution when sharing personal information such as your name, home address, phone number, and email address online. To take advantage of many online services, you will inevitably have to provide personal information in order to handle billing and shipping of purchased goods. Since not divulging any personal information is rarely possible, the following list contains some advice for how to share personal information safely online:

Keep an eye out for phony email messages. Things that indicate a message may be fraudulent are misspellings, poor grammar, odd phrasing, Web site addresses with strange extensions, Web site addresses that are entirely numbers where there are normally words, and anything else out of the ordinary. Additionally, phishing messages will often tell you that you have to act quickly to keep your account open, update your security, or urge you to provide information immediately or else something bad will happen. Don't take the bait. Don't respond to email messages that ask for personal information. Legitimate companies will not use email messages to ask for your personal information. When in doubt, contact the company by phone or by typing in the company Web address into your Web browser. Don't click on the links in these messages as they make take you to fraudulent, malicious Web sites. Steer clear of fraudulent Web sites used to steal personal information. When visiting a Web site, type the address (URL) directly into the Web browser rather than following a link within an email or instant message. Fraudsters often forge these links to make them look convincing. A shopping, banking or any other Web site where sensitive information should have an "S" after the letters "http" (i.e. https://

www.yourbank.com not http://www.yourbank.com). The "s" stands for secure and should appear when you are in an area requesting you to login or provide other sensitive data. Another sign that you have a secure connection is the small lock icon in the bottom of your web browser (usually the right-hand corner). 23 - Internet and online security Pay attention to privacy policies on Web sites and in software. It is important to understand how an organization might collect and use your personal information before you share it with them. Guard your email address. Spammers and "phishers" sometimes send millions of messages to email addresses that may or may not exist in hopes of finding a potential victim. Responding to these messages or even downloading images ensures you will be added to their lists for more of the same messages in the future. Also be careful when posting your email address online in newsgroups, blogs or online communities. Online offers that look too good to be true usually are The old saying "there's no such thing as a free lunch" still rings true today. Supposedly "free" software such as screen savers or smileys, secret investment tricks sure to make you untold fortunes, and contests that you've surprisingly won without entering are the enticing hooks used by companies to grab your attention. While you may not directly pay for the software or service with money, the free software or service you asked for may have been bundled with advertising software ("adware") that tracks your behavior and displays unwanted advertisements. You may have to divulge personal information or purchase something else in order to claim your supposed content winnings. If an offer looks so good it's hard to believe, ask for someone else's opinion, read the fine print, or even better, simply ignore it. Review bank and credit card statements regularly The impact of identity theft and online crimes can be greatly reduced if you can catch it shortly after your data is stolen or when the first use of your information is attempted. One of the easiest ways to get the tip-off that something has gone wrong is by reviewing the monthly statements provided by your bank and credit card companies for anything out of the ordinary. Additionally, many banks and services use fraud prevention systems that call out unusual purchasing behavior (i.e. if you live in Texas and all of the sudden start buying refrigerators in Budapest). In order to confirm these out of the ordinary purchases, they might call you and ask you to confirm them. Don't take these calls lightly; this is your hint Internet and online security - 24 that something bad may have happened and you should take necessary action. Protect your computer with Windows security tools Windows provides a variety of protection applications. Windows Updates If you have an active Internet connection, Windows can check for important updates for your computer and install them automatically. These updates include security patches and program updates that can improve your computing experience and help protect your computer against new viruses and attacks. How do I know when my computer is at risk?

If the Action Center reports an alert, or if your computer behaves erratically, crashes unexpectedly or if some of your programs do not work correctly, your computer may be infected by malicious software. However, do not blame every computer problem on a virus! If you suspect your computer is infected, the first thing to do is update, if you have not already done so, and run your antivirus and anti-spyware software.

Model Satellite Click P/N: XYXOKKOQOUOX. S/N: BBON1110W DC1@V== 2.37A Made in China (Z2Ss Contains FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 Contains IC:4104A-QCWB335 Aesthetic Design by Toshiba | Wz,

Model Satellite W3ODt-A P/N: XXXXXXXXXXXXX S/N: 8B011110W DC19V=2,37A Made in China (YAS Contains FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 Contains IC:4104A-QCWB335_ Aesthetic Design by Toshiba InRG

Model:Satelite W30L-A P/N: XXXXKOOUKNK S/N: SBOTT110W DCIWV=2.37A Made in China Contains FOC ID: PPD-QCWES35 Contains IC:4104A-GCWBS35 Aesthetic Design by Toshiba

Model: Toshiba Click P/N: XXXXXXXXXXXXX S/N: 8B011110W DC19V=2,37A Made in China cre Contains FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 Contains IC:4104A-QCWB335 Aesthetic Design by Toshiba InRG

ooo Ea PMU | Geno te Me esc cet) es 20 ST eg ta Ce Lt) Ca aoe ced Peres Gs ose) www.dell.com io Bo on

PROPOSED FCC ID LABEL AND LOCATION QUALCOMM ATHEROS, INC. FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 IC: 4104A-QCWB335 Model:QCWB335 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Printed Color Black White FCC / IC Label Location Bottom of EUT

SN:CNA209XXX www.hp.com Contains Qualcomm Atheros Model QCWB335 aaa He ee Contains FCC ID:PPD-QCWB33S CNC:C-xxxxx NOM pif IC:4104A-QCWB335 SCT:RCPxxxxx PNADAAAAABABA Model:E13-1000 WarrantylylyOy RMN: TPN-CIS O@ INPUT 19.5V Sue 3.33A Fe Ox PRI CAN ICES-3(8)/NMB-3(B) Made in China LISTED e133458 SN:CNA209XXX_ www.hp.com RMN: TPN-CNS @ INPUT 19.5V 55S 231A pacg | Contains Qualcomm Atheros Model GCWB335 samme He nae CAN ICES-3(8)/NMB-3(B) 60 60) FE' (UL) us Contains FCC ID:PPD-QCWB335 CNC:C-xxx%x NOM fy WE | 1c. : PN:AAAAAAABABA IC:4104A-QCWB335 SCT:RCPxxxxxx-xxxx LISTED E135459 Modol:E13-1000 Warranty:lylyOy Made in China

Date: 26 September 2014 To whom it may concern:

I, the undersigned, hereby authorize Andrea Hsia of Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch (BV CPS Taoyuan) of Taiwan to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by Andrea Hsia of BV CPS Taoyuan on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. In authorizing BV CPS Taoyuan as our representative, we still recognize that we are responsible to:

a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) comply with the relevant provisions of the certification program;

make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records

(including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation

(e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;

make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which certification has been granted;

do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification Division into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;

upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising matter that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;

use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity with specified standards;

endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a misleading manner;

ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division;

keep a record of all complaints made known to the us relating to the products compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the when requested;

take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies found in products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;

k) document the actions taken. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Best Regards Mark Ortlieb Staff Engineer, Regulatory Qualcomm Technologies Inc./Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.

Monday, July 07, 2014 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Authorization of Handling FCC Regulatory Applications FCC Identifier PPD To Whom it May Concern:

I hereby authorize Mr. Mark Ortlieb to handle FCC Regulatory related applications for QUALCOMM ATHEROS Incorporated FCC Identifier PPD and can sign all required application documents. Best regards, __________________________ Paul Guckian VP, Engineering Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. 5775 Morehouse Drive San Diego, CA 92121 Tel: 858-651-1547 pguckian@qti.qualcomm.com

Requesting Class II permissive change for FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 C.C.: Bureau Veritas Subject:

To Whom It May Concern:

The purpose of this letter is to request a Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 Originally granted on 05/29/2012. Applicant: Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. The major changes filed under this application are:

1. The subject approved module is being used in different host (Portable category Configuration, Host Brand/Model: See test report. 2. SAR Testing is performed to demonstrate compliance to RF exposure requirements. Best Regards Mark Ortlieb Staff Engineer, Regulatory Qualcomm Technologies Inc./Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1-858-658-3208 mortlieb@qti.qualcomm.com

Date: 24 November 2014 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject:

FCC ID:

Request for Confidentiality PPD-QCWB335 To Whom It May Concern:

Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Tune-up Power Antenna Specifications Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. Best Regards Mark Ortlieb Staff Engineer, Regulatory Qualcomm Technologies Inc./Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. mortlieb@qti.qualcomm.com

December 1, 2014 To Whom It May Concern:

We, Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. hereby apply for Class II permission change to the approved product under FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 (IC ID: 4104A-QCWB335), to portable category when applied in the laptop platform Brand Name: acer /Model Name: ZQX, Due to the design of the platform resulting in less than 20cm distance to human body, We have tested the platform with the FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 (IC ID: 4104A-QCWB335) device for SAR. Radiated emission testing was not additionally performed due to the following:

FCC approval The product with FCC ID: FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 (IC ID: 4104A-QCWB335) module was assessed compliant to radiated emission limits per 15.247 in its initial Original FCC testing was performed with a Bluetooth antenna of higher gain. The current platform under application uses an antenna of the same type but of lower gain across the emission bands. Hence it is apparent that the current platform yields lower level of radiated emission. The original FCC testing on module under FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 (IC ID: 4104A-

QCWB335) was performed when the antenna was connected to the module in an open environment. The current platform under application has the antenna installed inside the laptop enclosure. The physical restraints introduced by the laptop enclosure should have resulted in equal or lower level of radiated emission. Please kindly review the application documents submitted and grant approval for this permissive change application Sincerely yours, Stanley Lin, Global Product Compliance

PPD-QCWB335 Request for Confidentiality Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject:

FCC ID:

To Whom It May Concern:

Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Operational Description (antenna) Tune-up Procedure Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. 180 days short term confidentiality request:

In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the following exhibits be withheld from public viewing for a short term limited time of 180 days from the date of the Grant of Equipment Authorization, due to the sensitive business information. The subjected exhibits are:

External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos User Manual It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and that information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards Mark Ortlieb Staff Engineer, Regulatory Qualcomm Technologies Inc./Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1-858-658-3208 mortlieb@qti.qualcomm.com

Date: 20 August 2014 Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (HK) Ltd Taoyuan Branch (BV CPS Taoyuan) Taiwan To whom it may concern:

We, the undersigned, hereby authorize the Taiwan office of Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services Ltd. to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization. Any and all acts carried out by Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services Ltd. on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. In authorizing Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services Ltd. as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:

a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Comply with the relevant provisions of the certification program;

Make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;

Make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which certification has been granted;

Do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification Division into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;

Upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising matter that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;

Use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity with specified standards;

Endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a misleading manner;

Ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division;

Keep a record of all complaints made known to the us relating to the products compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;

j) Take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies found in products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;

k) Document the actions taken. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Best Regards Qualcomm Technologies Inc./Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. Mark Ortlieb Staff Engineer, Regulatory 1-858-658-3208 mortlieb@qti.qualcomm.com

Date: 2014/1/27 Power of Attorney Please be notified that I, Stanley Lin, have designated SPORTON INTERNATIONAL INC. as the agent being responsible for this project and to sign the form 731 and other documentation. Any and all acts carried out by SPORTON INTERNATIONAL INC. on the matters of relating to all processes required in the FCC approval and any communication needed with the national authority, shall have the same legal authority as acts on our own behalf. We further certifies that neither the applicant nor any party to this application, as defined in 47 CFR Ch. 1.2002 (b), is subject to a denial to Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1998, 21 U.S.C. 835(a). This authorization is limited to the product of as following:

FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 Class 2 permissive change to HP TPN-C115 If you have any acknowledgement and response, please send it to SPORTON INTERNATIONAL INC. directly. Should you have any questions or comments regarding this matter, please have my best attention. Sincerely yours, Stanley Lin Project Manager, Global Product Compliance Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.

www.qualcomm.com J QUALCOMM Incorporated 5775 Morehouse Drive San Diego, CA 92121-1714 September 16, 2013 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Authorization of Handling FCC Regulatory Applications FCC Identifier PPD To Whom It May Concern:

I, hereby, authorize Stanley Lin, to handle FCC Regulatory related applications for QUALCOMM ATHEROS Incorporated FCC Identifier PPD and can sign all required application documents. Best Regards, Paul Guckian VP, Engineering Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. 5775 Morehouse Drive San Diego, CA 92121 Office: 858-651-1547 pguckian@qualcomm.com

Date: 2014/1/27 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335

(Original Grant date: 05/29/2012) Applicant: Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335, originally granted on 05/29/2012. The major change filed under this application is:

The subject approved module is being used in a specific host (Portable category Configuration, Brand name/Model: see test report). SAR Testing is performed to demonstrate RF Compliance. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Stanley Lin Project Manager, Global Product Compliance Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.

Date: 2014/1/27 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject:

Request for Confidentiality FCC ID:

PPD-QCWB335 To Whom It May Concern:

Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Antenna Specification. Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments for 45 days. Test Setup Photos Internal Photos External Photos User Manual It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards Stanley Lin Project Manager, Global Product Compliance Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.

Date: 2013/11/15 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335

(Original Grant date: 05/29/2012) Applicant: Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335, originally granted on 05/29/2012. The major change filed under this application is:

The subject approved module is being used in a specific host (Portable category Configuration, Brand name/Model: see test report). SAR Testing is performed to demonstrate RF Compliance. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Stanley Lin Project Manager, Global Product Compliance Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.

Date: 2013/11/15 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject:

Request for Confidentiality FCC ID:

PPD-QCWB335 To Whom It May Concern:

Test Setup Photos Internal Photos External Photos User Manual Best Regards Stanley Lin Project Manager, Global Product Compliance Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Antenna Tune up procedure Specification. Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor the market. an unfair advantage in In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments for 90 days. It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued.

Date: 2013/11/15 Power of Attorney Please be notified that I, Stanley Lin, have designated CERPASS TECHNOLOGY CORP. as the agent being responsible for this project and to sign the form 731 and other documentation. Any and all acts carried out by CERPASS TECHNOLOGY CORP. on the matters of relating to all processes required in the FCC approval and any communication needed with the national authority, shall have the same legal authority as acts on our own behalf. We further certifies that neither the applicant nor any party to this application, as defined in 47 CFR Ch. 1.2002 (b), is subject to a denial to Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1998, 21 U.S.C. 835(a). This authorization is limited to the product of as following:

FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 Class 2 permissive change to Lenovo Yoga 2 11xxxxxx;

20332xxxxxx; 80CXxxxxxx (x=0-9, A-Z, - or Blank, for marketing use only) If you have any acknowledgement and response, please send it to CERPASS TECHNOLOGY CORP. directly. Should you have any questions or comments regarding this matter, please have my best attention. Sincerely yours, Stanley Lin Project Manager, Global Product Compliance Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.

Date: 2013/11/15 Power of Attorney Please be notified that I, Stanley Lin, have designated Bureau Veritas Consumer Product Service (Hong Kong) Limited, Taoyuan Branch as the agent being responsible for this project and to sign the form 731 and other documentation. Any and all acts carried out by Bureau Veritas Consumer Product Service (Hong Kong) Limited, Taoyuan Branch on the matters of relating to all processes required in the FCC approval and any communication needed with the national authority, shall have the same legal authority as acts on our own behalf. We further certifies that neither the applicant nor any party to this application, as defined in 47 CFR Ch. 1.2002 (b), is subject to a denial to Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1998, 21 U.S.C. 835(a). If you have any acknowledgement and response, please send it to Bureau Veritas Consumer Product Service (Hong Kong) Limited, Taoyuan Branch. directly. Should you have any questions or comments regarding this matter, please have my best attention. Sincerely yours, Stanley Lin Project Manager, Global Product Compliance Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.

Date: 2013/12/2 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335

(Original Grant date: 05/29/2012) Applicant: Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335, originally granted on 05/29/2012. The major change filed under this application is:

The subject approved module is being used in a specific host (Portable category Configuration, Brand name/Model: see test report). SAR and RSE Testing are performed to demonstrate RF Compliance. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Stanley Lin Project Manager, Global Product Compliance Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.

Date: 2013/12/2 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject:

Request for Confidentiality FCC ID:

PPD-QCWB335 To Whom It May Concern:

Test Setup Photos Internal Photos External Photos User Manual Best Regards Stanley Lin Project Manager, Global Product Compliance Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Antenna Specification. Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments for 90 days. It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued.

Maximum Target power of WLAN/ BT TX Power Setting

- Each product is programmed with the pre-defined RF parameters

- Each product RF power level is measured to ensure the power level not exceeding the target power level, in a fully calibrated setup.

- The user has no possibility to change these settings later on Please find below the Maximum Transmit Power for production units:

IEEE 802.11 Average Power (dBm) Mode / Band Center Freq b g HT20 HT40 WLAN 2.4GHz 18.0 18.0 16.5

(MHz) 2412 2422 2437 2452 2462 17.5 12.0 11.0 17.5 15.0 13.5 11.0 14.5 12.0 Average Power (dBm) Mode / Band 1Mbps 2Mbps 3Mbps BT4.0-LE

(GFSK)

(/4-DQPSK) (8-DPSK)

(GFSK) 2.4 GHz Bluetooth 8.55 8.78 8.77 8.43 Power unit: dBm The maximum output power, after for manufacturing tolerances, in production units will not exceed the value listed in the table above. Production units are all within (+0 , -3 dB) of this value.

Date: Feb 4th 2013 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref:

FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335

(Original Grant date: 05/29/2012) Applicant: Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335, originally granted on 05/29/2012. The major change filed under this application is:

1. BOM change to passive matching. 2. Schematics change. 3. Minor Layout change. 4. Shielding change. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Michael Green Manager, Global Product Compliance Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.

Request for Confidentiality Date:2013/2/4 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject:

FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 To Whom It May Concern:

Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. QCWB335 Change list Shielding drawing Schematics BOM PCB Layout Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. Pursuant to DA 04-1705 of the Commissions Rules, we request short-term confidential treatment for the following information until 45 days of Equipment Authorization in order to ensure sensitive business information remains confidential until the actual marketing of the device:

External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards Michael Green / Manager, Global Product Compliance QUALCOMM ATHEROS, INC. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 T 408.773.5200 | F 408-773-9940 qca.qualcomm.com

www.qualcomm.com J QUALCOMM Incorporated 5775 Morehouse Drive San Diego, CA 92121-1714 June 15, 2011 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Authorization of Handling FCC Regulatory Applications To Whom It May Concern:

I, hereby, authorize Mr. Michael Green, to handle FCC Regulatory related applications for QUALCOMM ATHEROS Incorporated and sign all required application documents. Best Regards, Paul Guckian VP, Engineering QUALCOMM Incorporated 5775 Morehouse Drive San Diego, CA 92121 Office: 858-651-1547 pguckian@qualcomm.com

Date: June 7, 2012 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref:

FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335

(Original Grant date: 05/29/2012) Applicant: Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335, originally granted on 05/29/2012. The major change filed under this application is:

Add WLAN and Bluetooth coexistence mode. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Michael Green Manager, Global Product Compliance Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.

Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Dr, San Jose, California 95110, United States Request for Modular Approval for Bluetooth/WLAN FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 Date: May 2, 2012 Item Requirements EUT 1 The modular transmitter must have its own The modular transmitter is equipped with an own RF shielding. metal shielding. 2 The modular transmitter must have buffered The EUT has buffer modulation / data inputs. 3 The modular transmitter must have its own The EUT has its own power supply regulation. modulation / data inputs. power supply regulation. 4 The modular transmitter must comply with The EUT meets the FCC antenna requirements. The the antenna requirements of the Section spurious emission, unique antenna connector and 15.203 and 15.204(c). photo of antennas are shown in the External and Internal photos. 5 The modular transmitter must be tested in a The module was tested on evaluation board which stand-alone configuration. is a stand-alone HW. 6 The modular transmitter must be labeled The modular transmitter will be labeled with in own with its own FCC ID number. FCC ID and the integration manual contains labeling instructions for the host device into which this module will be integrated. 7 The modular transmitter must comply with The modular approved transmitter complied with all any specific rule or operating requirements applicable rules and the integration manual contains applicable to the transmitter and the any specific requirements addressed to the manufacturer must provide adequate integrator and / or to the end-user of the final instructions along with the module to end-product. explain any such requirements. 8 The modular transmitter must comply with With the dedicated antenna (3.62 dBi) the modular any applicable RF exposure requirement. transmitter complied with the FCC RF exposure requirements for fixed and mobile applications. Effective Date: Immediately.

2012/4/30 To whom it may concern:

Power of Attorney We, the undersigned Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. hereby authorize Jones Tsai in Sporton International Inc. to act on our behalf in all matters relating to all processes required in the FCC Part 15 approval and any communication needed with the national authority. Any and all acts carried out by Sporton Internal Inc. on our behalf shall have the same effects as acts of our own. This authorization is limited to the following products FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 We further certifies that neither the applicant nor any party to this application, as defined in 47 CFR Ch. 1.2002 (b), is subject to a denial to Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1998, 21 U.S.C. 835(a). If you have any questions regarding the authorization, please dont hesitate to contact us. Thank you!

Sincerely yours,

Michael Green / Manager, Global Product Compliance QUALCOMM ATHEROS, INC. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 T 408.773.5200 | F 408-773-9940 qca.qualcomm.com

Request for Confidentiality Date:2012/4/30 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject:

FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 To Whom It May Concern:

Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Schematic Diagram Block Diagram Theory of Operation Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. Pursuant to DA 04-1705 of the Commissions Rules, we request short-term confidential treatment for the following information to 45 days of Equipment Authorization in order to ensure sensitive business information remains confidential until the actual marketing of the device:

External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos User Manual It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards

Michael Green / Manager, Global Product Compliance QUALCOMM ATHEROS, INC. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 T 408.773.5200 | F 408-773-9940 qca.qualcomm.com